The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB10-0105 permit set project manual divisions 21-23, 26-28Town of Vail Fire and Emergency Services Fire Station #3 2399 North Frontage Road West Vail, Colorado Permit Set Project Manual Divisions 21 - 23 & 26 - 28 June 10, 2010 Project 0.09083 to- o � D JUN 1 2010 TOWN OF VAIL DePartment t,, 1 C t. _ c c _.. of $8 vc. -' c � -..... ~.. m v C . - ..: CL - f b, f a The = o th,. ; _ cc�a c cf � �y c co 0 ' PLANS EXAMIN DATA(! l Architecture ' Planning Interiors Town of Vail Fire and Emergency Services -: Fire Station #3 Project Roster z ° W. x K � q d CLIENT CIVIL ENGINEER ' ' Vail Fire and Emergency Services Marcin Engineering LLC 42 West Meadow Drive 101 Eagle Road Vail, Colorado 81657 Avon, CO 81620 ' 970.477.3474 / Mark Miller 970.748.0274 / Paul Anderson ' OWNER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Town of Vail Monroe and Newell Engineers Inc. 1309 Elkhorn Drive 70 Benchmark Road Suite 204 ' Vail Colorado 81657 Avon Colorado 81620 970.479.2161 / Todd Oppenheimer 970.668.3776 / Peter Monroe ' ARCHITECT MECH/ELEC ENGINEER Belford Watkins Group, LLC Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers 231 South Howes Street 110 East Beaver Creek Blvd Suite 202 ' Fort Collins, CO 80522 Avon, Colorado 81620 970.212.1243 / Don Watkins 970.949.6108 / Marc Sacconi DESIGN/LANDSCAPE CONSULTANT LEED CONSULTANT VAg Inc. Institute for the Built Environment 90 Benchmark Road, Suite 202 Guggenheim Hall ' Avon, CO 81620 Fort Collins, Colorado 80526 970.959.7034 / Anne Gunion 970.491.4041 / Josie Plaut ' CONTRACTOR GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANT Drahota Construction Koechlein Consulting Engineers, Inc 4700 Innovation Drive, Bldg C 12364 West Alameda Parkway, Suite 115 ' Fort Collins, CO 80527 Lakewood, Colorado 80228 970.204.0100 / Scott Warner 303.989.1223 / Jessica Street ' CONSTRUCTION MANAGER SURVEYOR AEC Integrated Program Mgt, Inc Gore Range Surveying, LLC 011 Eagle Park Drive 5129 Longsun Lane Eagle, CO 81631 Avon, Colorado 81620 970.471.5354 / Adam Williams 970.479.8698 / Sam Ecker Y 4 ' PROJECT: Town of Vail Vail Fire and Emergency Services Station #3 ' Vail, Colorado Belford Watkins Group Architects Project No. 09083 y' sk t 033000 Cast -In -Place Concrete 1 -9 DIVISION 4 — MASONRY 042200 Concrete Unit Masonry 1 -9 044300 Thin Stone Veneer 1 -9 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE I TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE ' A. Table of Contents 1-4 B. Specifications ' DIVISION 1 — GENERAL CONDITIONS 011000 Summary 1 -4 ' 012100 Allowances 1 -3 012200 Unit Prices 1 -3 fed v t:; =2 012500 Substitution Procedures 1 -3 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 1 -3 012900 Payment Procedures 1 -4 ' 013100 Project Management and Coordination 1 -6 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 1 -6 013233 Photographic Documentation 1 013300 Submittal Procedures 1 -9 ' 014000 Quality Requirements 1 -7 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1 -8 016000 Product Requirements 1 -5 ' 017300 Execution Requirements 1 -8 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 1 -5 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 1 -6 1 -7 017839 Project Record Documents 1 -3 017900 Demonstration and Training 1 -3 018113 Sustainable Design Requirements 1 -4 019113 General Commissioning Requirements 1 -3 ' DIVISION 2 — EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Structure Demolition 1-4 ' DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE t 033000 Cast -In -Place Concrete 1 -9 DIVISION 4 — MASONRY 042200 Concrete Unit Masonry 1 -9 044300 Thin Stone Veneer 1 -9 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE I DIVISION 6 — WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 061000 Rough Carpentry 1 -6 061600 Sheathing 1 -3 061753 UP 1 -5 061800 Glued- Laminated Construction 1 -3 062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry DIVISION 5 — METALS 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry 1 -3 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork 1 -5 066400 Plastic Paneling 051200 Structural Steel Framing _ 1 -6 052100 Steel Joist Framing n r " `' 1 -4 053100 Steel Decking 1 -5 054000 Cold- Formed Metal Framing, g "3 .'� 1 -6 055000 Metal Fabrications 4� '.�, �� :;:`° -`" 1 -6 055100 Metal Stairs y 1 -6 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings �; 1 -5 055300 Metal Gratings _ 1 -3 DIVISION 6 — WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 061000 Rough Carpentry 1 -6 061600 Sheathing 1 -3 061753 Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses 1 -5 061800 Glued- Laminated Construction 1 -3 062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry 1 -2 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry 1 -3 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork 1 -5 066400 Plastic Paneling 1 -2 DIVISION 7 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071326 Self- Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 1 -5 072100 Thermal Insulation 1 -6 072700 Weather Barriers 1 -2 074213 Metal Wall Panels 1 -6 074600 Siding 4 075323 Ethylene- Propylene- Diene- Monomer Roofing (EPDM) 1 -7 076100 Sheet Metal Roofing 1 -9 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1 -7 079200 Joint Sealants 1 -7 DIVISION 8 — OPENINGS 081113 081416 083113 083613 083614 084113 085113 085314 086200 087100 088000 088300 089000 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors Access Doors and Frames Sectional Overhead Doors Four -Fold Doors Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts Aluminum Windows Fiberglass Windows Tubular Skylights Door Hardware Glazing Mirrors Louvers and Vents 1 -8 1 -4 1 -3 1 -6 1 -4 1 -11 1 -5 1 -5 1 -5 1 -11 1 -6 1 -3 1 -4 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 092216 Non - Structural Metal Framing 1 -4 092900 Gypsum Board 1 -5 093000 Tiling 1 -7 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 1-4 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 1 -5 5 � s tF� .T-4 099113 Exterior Painting 1 -4 099123 Interior Painting 1 -6 099600 High - Performance Coatings 1 -6 DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 101100 Visual Display Surfaces 1 -4 101400 Signage 1 -6 102600 Wall and Door Protection 1 -3 102800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 1 -7 104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 1 -3 104416 Fire Extinguishers 1 -2 105112 Firefighter Lockers 1 -2 105500 Postal Specialties 1 -3 107500 Flagpoles 1 -3 DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT 114000 Stainless Steel Countertops 1 -2 115213 Projection Screens 1 -2 DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds 1 -3 122413 Roller Window Shades 1 -3 DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used) DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS 141010 Chain Hoists 1 -2 142400 Hydrae Elevatdrs 1 -6 y K.. a ♦ r_ PAGE 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 21 - FIRE PROTECTION 210010 Fire Protection General Provisions 1 210050 Fire Protection Basic Materials and Methods 1 210300 Fire Protection 1 -10 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220010 Plumbing General Provisions 1 -17 220050 Plumbing Basic Materials and Method 1 -11 220080 Plumbing Insulation 1 -36 220548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing 1 -8 221116 Domestic Water Piping 1 -13 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 1 -11 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 1 -11 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 1 -8 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 1 -10 221423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 1 -5 221429 Sump Pumps 1 -3 221513 General - Service Compressed -Air Piping 1 -9 DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230010 HVAC General Provisions 1 230050 HVAC Basic Materials and Methods 1 230080 HVAC Insulation 1 230548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 1 -8 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 1 -13 230800 Commissioning of HVAC 1 -5 231123 Facility Natural -Gas Piping 1 -13 232113 Hydronic Piping 1 -14 232123 Hydronic Pumps 1 -6 232300 Refrigerant Piping 1 -9 233113 Metal Ducts 1 -16 233300 Air Duct Accessories 1 -12 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators 1 -7 233713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 1 -5 235216 Condensing Boilers 1 -8 235700 Heat Exchangers for HVAC 14 236200 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units 1 -4 237200 Air -To -Air Energy Recovery Equipment 1 -6 238126 Split- System Air - Conditioners 1 -6 238219 Fan Coil Units 1 -4 238239 Unit Heaters 1 -5 238316 Radiant- Heating Hydronic Piping 1 -5 238400 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 1 -13 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 092216 Non - Structural Metal Framing 1 -4 092900 Gypsum Board 1 -5 093000 Tiling 1 -7 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories WA 1 -5 099113 Exterior Painting 1 -4 099123 Interior Painting 1 -6 099600 High - Performance Coatings 1 -6 DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 101100 Visual Display Surfaces 1 -4 101400 Signage 1 -6 102600 Wall and Door Protection 1 -3 102800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 1 -7 104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 1 -3 104416 Fire Extinguishers 1 -2 105112 Firefighter Lockers 1 -2 105500 Postal Specialties 1 -3 107500 Flagpoles 1 -3 DIVISION I 1 — EQUIPMENT 114000 Stainless Steel Countertops 1 -2 115213 Projection Screens 1 -2 DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds 1 -3 122413 Roller Window Shades 1 -3 DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used) DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS 141010 Chain Hoists TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 3 DIVISION 21 - FIRE PROTECTION 210010 Fire Protection General Provisions 210050 Fire Protection Basic Materials and Methods 210300 Fire Protection DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220010 Plumbing General Provisions 220050 Plumbing Basic Materials and Method 220080 Plumbing Insulation 220548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 221423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 221429 Sump Pumps 221513 General- Service Compressed -Air Piping DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230010 HVAC General Provisions 230050 HVAC Basic Materials and Methods 230080 HVAC Insulation 230548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230800 Commissioning of HVAC 231123 Facility Natural -Gas Piping 232113 Hydronic Piping 232123 Hydronic Pumps 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators 233713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 235216 Condensing Boilers 235700 Heat Exchangers for HVAC 236200 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units 237200 Air -To -Air Energy Recovery Equipment 238126 Split- System Air - Conditioners 238219 Fan Coil Units 238239 Unit Heaters 238316 Radiant - Heating Hydronic Piping 238400 Vehicle Exhaust Removal System TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 1 -10 1 -17 1 -11 1 -36 1 -8 1 -13 1 -11 1 -11 1 -8 1 -10 1 -5 1 -3 1 -9 1 1 1 -8 1 -13 1 -5 1 -13 1 -14 1 -6 1 -9 1 -16 1 -12 1 -7 1 -5 1 -8 1 -4 1 -4 1 -6 1 -6 1 -4 1 -5 1 -5 1 -13 PAGE I DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL f.. ' 260010 260519 Electrical General Provisions Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 1 -12 1 -3 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1 -5 ' 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 1 -3 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1 -6 282300 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 1 -4 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 260923 Lighting Control Devices 1 -5 311000 ' 262416 Panelboards 1 -9 Earth Moving 1 -9 262726 Wiring Devices 1 -6 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 1 -4 321216 263213 Engine Generators 1 -11 321313 Concrete Paving 263600 Transfer Switches 1 -4 Miscellaneous Site Improvements 265100 Interior Lighting 1 -4 Segmental Retaining Wa 1 -9 265600 Exterior Lighting 1 -5 1 -15 DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATIONS 329200 Turf and Grasses ' 270528 Pathways for Communication Systems 1 -7 1 -10 270544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals For Comm. Pathways and Cabling 1 -4 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 1 -7 ' 271500 Communication Horizontal Cabling 1 -14 Subdrainage 1 -3 274000 Audiovisual Systems 1 -8 DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security 1 -8 280528 Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security 1 -5 ' 280544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic and Security Pathway And Cabling 1 -3 282300 Video Surveillance 1 -6 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK x ' 311000 Site Clearing 1 -4 312000 Earth Moving 1 -9 ' DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 Asphalt Paving 1 -5 ' 321313 Concrete Paving 1 -8 322800 Miscellaneous Site Improvements 32 , 3223 Segmental Retaining Wa 1 -9 328400 P1ar�ting Irrigation 1 -15 329200 Turf and Grasses 1 -9 _ 329300 Plants A 1 -10 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES `"° "_� % 334600 Subdrainage 1 -3 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 5 SECTION 210010 —FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to specification section 220010 "Plumbing General Provisions" for this section. END OF SECTION 210010 FIRE PROTECTION 210010-1 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 210050 —FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to specification section 220050 "Plumbing Basic Material and Method" for this section. END OF SECTION 210050 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC 210050-1 MATERIAL AND METHOD SECTION 210300 —FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS, PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT INCLUDES A. Design and Install Sprinkler Systems: 1. Wet pipe system with automatic sprinklers. 2. Dry pipe system with automatic sprinklers. 3. Standpipe and Hose System: a. Dry, with manually operated control devices, for training purposes. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these Specifications. Consult them for further instruction and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300. B. ANSI/ASME Section 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - coated Welded and Seamless. D. AWS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. E. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. F. NFPA 13R – Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories in Height G. NFPA 14 – Installation of standpipe and hose systems. H. NFPA 24 - Private Fire Service Mains. 1.4 COVERAGE A. Provide wet pipe fire protection system(s) for the entire facility. B. Provide dry pipe fire protection system(s) for those areas subject to freezing, as determined by local jurisdiction. FIRE PROTECTION 210300-1 C. Confirm hazard classifications with the authority having jurisdiction. D. Refer to mechanical plans for fire sprinkler riser locations and on -site fire mains. Field verify piping mains to be utilized for project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design and installation to conform. 1. NFPA 13 and 13R for sprinkler systems 2. NFPA 14 for standpipes. 3. NFPA 24 for private service mains. 4. ASME B31.9 for piping. B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL/FM label or marking. C. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in sprinkler systems with five years experience. D. The designer shall be registered with the State of Colorado as a Professional Engineer or Nicet Class III Engineering Technician. The plans shall bear that stamp. E. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. F. Weld materials and procedures shall conform to ASME Code. G. Employ certified welders in accordance with ANSI /ASME Section 9. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Hydraulic calculations, product data, and shop drawings shall bear the stamp of approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 01. B. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, pipe materials used, jointing methods, floor and wall penetration seals, valve data and ratings, components and accessories. C. Submit shop drawings, product data and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place, under provisions of Division 01. FIRE PROTECTION 210300-2 � rl� Ll B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in place until installation. 1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Division 01. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 01. B. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and Record Drawings. 1.11 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13. B. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type. C. Provide metal storage cabinet in location designated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Piping Outside Building 1. All pipe outside the building to the service termination inside the building: 4" and larger, Class 50, 350 psi pressure rating, ductile iron mechanical joint, push -on joint or equivalent. 3" and smaller; Type "K" hard drawn copper. B. Pipe and Fittings Inside the Building 1. Piping materials; designed for 175 psi working pressure, conforming to ASTM specifications and to have the manufacturer's name or brand, along with the applicable ASTM standard, marked on each length of pipe. a. Pipe; Schedule 40, black steel pipe, ASTM 1) Al20 or A53 joined by screwed joints, welded joints, or by mechanical grooved couplings or push -on couplings jointed by UL and FM approved combination of couplings, gaskets and grooves where approved by authority having jurisdiction. '' FIRE PROTECTION 210300-3 Li 2.2 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions: 150 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping. B. Flanges: 150 psi forged steel slip -on flanges for ferrous piping. C. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. 2.3 GATE VALVES A. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS &Y, solid wedge. 2.4 CHECK VALVES A. Bronze, swing disc. B. Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat. C. Iron body, bronze trim spring loaded, renewable composition disc. 2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Iron body, bronze disc and stem resilient replaceable liner seat. 2.6 DRAIN VALVES A. Bronze compression stop with nipple and cap or hose thread. 41 FIRE PROTECTION 210300-4 u b. may Pipe be Schedule 10, black steel pipe where approved by authority having Y jurisdiction joined by welded joints or by UL and FM approved mechanical couplings where approved by authority having jurisdiction. All ASTM A135 sprinkler pipe must be tested with a non - destructive electric test for continuous and uninterrupted inspection of the welded seam. C. Sprinkler piping that is exposed to the weather, or used in a corrosive atmosphere shall be galvanized. d. Tubing shall be copper, Type "K" or "L ", suitable to withstand water working pressure not less than 175 psi joined by brazed joints except solder joints may be permitted for wet pipe systems in Light Hazard occupancies where temperature classification of the installed sprinklers is ordinary or intermediate. Solder joints may also be permitted for wet pipe systems in Ordinary Hazard - Group 1 occupancies where piping is concealed. Brazing filler metal shall be classification BCUP -3 or BCUP -4 in accordance with AWS A5.8. Solder metal shall be 95 -5 (tin antimony - Grade 95 TA) in accordance with ASTM B32. e. Where pressures are between 175 psi and 300 psi, standard wall pipe and 300 psi W.O.G. valves shall be used as permitted by ANSI Standards. 2.2 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions: 150 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping. B. Flanges: 150 psi forged steel slip -on flanges for ferrous piping. C. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. 2.3 GATE VALVES A. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS &Y, solid wedge. 2.4 CHECK VALVES A. Bronze, swing disc. B. Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat. C. Iron body, bronze trim spring loaded, renewable composition disc. 2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Iron body, bronze disc and stem resilient replaceable liner seat. 2.6 DRAIN VALVES A. Bronze compression stop with nipple and cap or hose thread. 41 FIRE PROTECTION 210300-4 u � I B. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. 2.7 VALVE OPERATORS A. Provide handwheels for gate and drain valves. B. For butterfly valves provide level lock handle with toothed plate. 2.8 VALVE CONNECTIONS A. Provide valve connections to match pipe joints. Use valves of pipe size. B. Provide butterfly valve with tapped lug body when used for isolating service. 2.9 PIPES AND FITTINGS: A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C115, ductile -iron barrel with iron -alloy threaded flanges. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 in sizes 6 inches and small, Schedule 30 in sizes 8 inches and larger, black and galvanized. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, Schedule 10 through 5 inch and plain ends, black and galvanized. D. Fittings: Suitable for service class and piping type; threaded, grooved -end, press -seal types. E. Joining Materials: Welding and gasket materials suitable for design temperatures and pressures. Victualic materials and couplings. 2.10 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Alarm Horn/Strobe: Electric type, by Fire Alarm Contractor. B. Flow Switch: Vane type with retard chamber. C. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, pipe nipple and bronze ball valve. D. Control Panels: Single area, two area, or single area cross -zoned as required, NEMA ICS 6 Type 1 enclosure. E. Water Meters: AWWA C700 series as applicable. F. Backflow Preventers: ASSE, sized for maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss. G. Fire Department connections: UL 405, fire approved exposed, wall type unit, connections and finish suitable for use. H. Alarm Devices: Water- motor - operated alarms, waterflow indicators, pressure switches, and supervisory switches. I FIRE PROTECTION 210300-5 �� I I. Pressure Gages: UL 393. J. Automatic ball drip, Potter Roemer Series 5980, Croker - Standard 148 or 187, or equivalent. 2.11 AIR COMPRESSOR A. Single unit, electric motor driven, ASME rated horizontal receiver tank, air pressure operated electric switch motor, safety valves, check valves, automatic tank drain, muffler - filter, belt guard, and controls. B. Electrical characteristics of air compressors shall be I I5V /60/1. Include conduit and wiring to nearest circuit breaker. C. Provide air pressure maintenance device(s) as required. 2.12 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Concealed pendant type with white finish, with matching escutcheon. Confirm finish with Architect. B. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type with chrome finish. Confirm finish with Architect. C. Sidewall Type: Chrome plated finish with matching escutcheon. Confirm finish with Architect. D. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. E. Guards: Finish matching sprinkler head. F. Provide escutcheons for all heads located in areas with finished ceilings. 2.13 HOSE VALVES A. Hose valve for fire department use (where pressure is 100 psi or higher) Croker - Standard 457, Potter Roemer 4053 or equivalent (to fit 9" deep cabinet) 2 -1/2" (inlet and outlet) adjustable pressure regulating angle hose valve for direct connection to high pressure fire protection water riser. Valve shall be bronze with U.L. listed with cap and chain. B. Hose valve for fire department use (where pressure is less than 100 psi) Potter Roemer Series 4065, Croker - Standard 157 or equivalent. 2 -1/2" angle hose valve. Valve to be bronze and U.L. listed with cap and chain. 2.14 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide a check valve with ball drip in line in fire department connection and a flush two way connection, polished brass of an U.L. approved type. Wall plate shall have 1" high letters and read "Auto Sprinklers ". FIRE PROTECTION 210300-6 2.15 WATER FLOW INDICATORS A. Provide water flow indicators in each standpipe riser system and on each automatic sprinkler system. 2.16 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Provide pressure gauges as required. U.L. Listed 4 -1/2" dial type with a maximum limit of not less than twice the normal working pressure. 2.17 VALVE SUPERVISION A. Monitor all water supply shut off valves for the Fire Protection Systems where shown on drawings with valve supervisor. 2.18 DRY PIPE VALVE: A. UL listed, FM approved. Provide with drip check valve, drain cup, reset bar, alarm test shut off valve and drain check valve, and accelerator if required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICE A. Furnish water service from the main to a flange inside the building wall. Connect to flange and provide completed systems throughout the building. B. The Contractor shall run all fire lines on site including valves and fire hydrants as shown on drawings. C. Pipe passing under building grade beams shall have a 6" minimum clearance to prevent possible damage from building settlement. D. All valves to be provided with cast iron valve box, extension top and cover marked with letter .. E. Piping outside the building shall have not less than four feet six inches of cover from finished grade. Surround pipe with 4" of clean sand. F. Provide backflow preventer assembly at fire entry piping assembly. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work. B. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. FIRE PROTECTION 210300-7 C. Remove burrs and bevel plain end ferrous pipe. D. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Locate outside alarm on building wall. Obtain approval of location from Architect and Authority. B. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. C. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. D. Center heads in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. E. Apply strippable tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not receive field paint finish. F. When sprinkler heads are installed where they may be exposed or subjected to mechanical damage, furnish head guards. G. Provide sleeves for pipe passing through building walls and floors above grade, sleeves of standard weight steel pipe. The annular spaces between pipe and sleeves shall be packed tight with caulking. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates large enough to cover the pipe sleeve. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Screw joint steel piping up to and including 2 inch diameter. Weld piping 2 -1/2 inch diameter and larger, including branch connections. B. Mechanical grooved joints may be used instead of threaded or welded joints. C. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non -toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. D. Coat threaded ends with pipe lubricant compound. E. In steel piping, main sized saddle branch connections or direct connection of branch lines to mains is permitted if main is one pipe size larger than the branch for up to 6 inch mains. Do not project branch pipes inside the main pipe. F. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems. G. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. H. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, and walls. a i I. Seal pipe and sleeve penetration to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. FIRE PROTECTION 210300-8 �I 3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Provide gate valves for shut -off or isolating service. C. Where approved, butterfly valves may be used instead of gate valves. D. Provide drain valves at main shut -off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. E. Provide locking devices with alarm functions on all valves where required per code or by authority having jurisdiction. 3.6 INSTALLATION - SPRINKLER HEADS A. Coordinate sprinkler head layout with Architect prior to submission of drawings and hydraulic calculations. Obtain from Architect prior to beginning work. 3.7 INSTALLATION - AIR COMPRESSOR A. Install air compressor on vibration isolators per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.8 CLEANING A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS A. Hydrostatically test entire system. B. Test shall be witnessed by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3.10 PIPE SUPPORTS A. All piping shall be supported by means of hangers tested and listed as approved by UL and/or FM. Sizing, spacing, and installation shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 13, "Sprinkler Systems," except as otherwise shown on Drawings or specified herein. 3.11 ALARMS A. Provide fire entry station consisting of O.S. & Y. gate valve check valve and U.L. approved flow switch and outside weatherproof electric alarms consisting of audible horn and visual light devices. FIRE PROTECTION 210300-9 B. Alarms shall be connected to every fire sprinkler system and such alarm devices shall be located on the exterior of the building within twenty -five (25) feet of the fire department connection except where the fire department connection serves more than one building and is installed on a yard main. When such occurs, the alarm device shall be located on the exterior of each building. Additional horn and/or light type devices shall be within visual and/or hearing distance of all areas within each building. 3.12 DRAWOFFS AND DRAINS A. Install all sprinkler branches and piping to drain to the main line on supply riser with 2" discharge pipe running to outside. Test line to drain by gravity to prevent freezing. 3.13 ZONE SPRINKLER CONTROL ASSEMBLY A. Provide and install control assembly for each sprinkler zone. Control assembly shall include shut off valve pressure regulating valve set at 175 psi where pressure exceeds 175 psi, water flow indicator, pressure relief valve set at 175 psi, test valve, drain valve, sight glass, and orificed union (size of orifice to be the same as sprinkler head orifice). 3.14 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. The sprinkler system is based on the following criteria: Light Hazard occupancy with quick response head for all dwelling units. Light Hazard occupancy for public, common and office areas. Ordinary Hazard Group I for the parking garage and retail areas. Ordinary Hazard Group II for trash rooms, boiler rooms, pool equipment rooms and other similar spaces. 3.15 INSTRUCTION 0 I?l it li it P , n A. When required approvals of this work have been obtained, and at time designated by the Owner, demonstrate to the Owner's personnel the operation and maintenance and demonstrate the contents of the approval manual. 3.16 HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall prepare hydraulic calculations for the design of the system and submit for approval. Submittals shall include but not be limited to: 1. Computer printout sheets or hand calculation sheets with all calculations. 2. Cross reference points of calculations both on the drawings and in the calculations by symbol or number. END OF SECTION 210300 IJ E J FIRE PROTECTION 210300-10 t SECTION 220010— PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. ' B. LEED Requirements, Section 018113. C. Commissioning Requirements, Section 019113. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems subject to the conditions of the contract. The work also includes the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil, grease, antifreeze and brine. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER on request. B. Work Not Included I 1. Certain labor and materials may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. Coordinate with other trades and arrange the work to make the parts fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications. a. Temporary Heat: See Paragraph 1.7, this Section and Division 01. b. Roof Curbs: See Paragraph 3.9, this Section. C. Concrete: See paragraph 3.10, this Section. d. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: See paragraph 3.11, this section. e. Temporary Water and Toilet: See Division 01. C. Equipment Furnished by Owner 1. The Owner will award contracts, which will commence concurrently with this contract. Specifically this work will include: a. Equipment Installation: Refer to appropriate drawings for equipment furnished by the Owner. b. Kitchen equipment: Ventilating hoods and miscellaneous equipment requiring plumbing and HVAC rough -in and final connections. i PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-1 PROVISIONS H Rough -in service pipes to locations as required by architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves on all pipes except waste and vent pipes, plug or cap these. Final connections to equipment will be made by the Contractor. 1.3 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 01, and the mechanical drawings and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, food service, civil, electrical, specialty systems, and interior design drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the mechanical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the mechanical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the mechanical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the work. Coordinate mechanical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed mechanical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.4 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES /SITE A. Visit the premises site before submitting bid as no extras will be allowed for lack of knowledge of existing conditions. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to applicable sections of NFPA 13, 13R, and 24. B. Conform to the National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition. C. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. D. In case of difference between these specifications, codes, laws, industry standards, and/or utility company regulations the most stringent shall govern. E. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-2 PROVISIONS 0 r fl 0 [1 H HI 1 u u 1 Li 1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work. 1. Do not include the cost of any "Plant Investment Fee" or "System Development Charge" for sewer and/or water charged by the City. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner. 2. Do not include the cost of any "Gas Application Fee" charged by the Utility Company. This will be arranged and paid for by the Owner. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.7 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating ' system will not be allowed without written authorization from the MECHANICAL ENGINEER. In case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all costs until acceptance by the Owner. 1.8 EXISTING UTILITIES A. The plans indicate the location, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If utilities are encountered during construction, which are not shown on the drawings, ask for instructions from the Architect. ' Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by change order. Assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and repair any damage caused by this construction at no extra charge to the Owner. B. Investigate with proper authorities for all existing water taps, etc. and make arrangements to pay for all removal charges in original bid. C. Owners of all underground utilities shall be notified at least 2 business days prior to excavation so that they can locate and mark underground facilities. 1.9 DRAWINGS A. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings, and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. B. Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building except where otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless approval is given in writing by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER for deviation. PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-3 PROVISIONS 1.10 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Failure to so request clarification of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility. The signing of the Contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.11 ROUGH -IN A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment. B. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for additional rough -in requirements. 1.12 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of /< " =1" -0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessary limited) to the following: 1. Ductwork 2. Hydronic Piping 3. Plumbing Piping 4. Fire sprinkler piping 5. Electrical conduit mains 1.13 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS F] 0 J 1 1 -1 7 J H_ 0 H_ u C A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-4 PROVISIONS C B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. ' C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for ' efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the building. F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, and in accordance with minimum required clearances as specified in codes and regulations. ' H. The word "concealed" as used in this specification refers to such spaces as pipe and duct chases, pipe and duct trenches, above plastered ceilings, in walls and buried where pipe and/or duct is inaccessible when building is complete. "Exposed" is intended to be within equipment rooms, "push ' unfinished areas, above up" ceilings, accessible pipe and duct tunnels. I. The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to Project, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project, from inspecting and ' unloading, to completion in place, ready for intended use. The term "provide" means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. ' 1.14 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Proposed Product List: Include Products specified in Divisions 22 and 23 specifications. ' C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, Products, and accessories in a single submittal. ' D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. E. Submit miscellaneous items specified on the drawings, but not covered in the specifications. ' Make no substitutions without prior approval from the Architect. ' 1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings on all equipment, Temperature Controls and Fire Protection. Provide shop drawings to the Architect and Engineer showing locations of all access panels. ' B. Shop drawings for include, but limited to, the following: required this project are not PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-5 PROVISIONS fl 1. Plumbing Fixtures 2. Insulation 3. Boilers 4. Pumps 5. Fans 6. Condensing Units 7. Fire Protection 8. Piping 9. Temperature Controls 10. Glycol Feeders 11. Heat Exchangers 12. Unit and Cabinet Unit Heaters 13. Fan Coil Units 14. Heat Recovery Ventilators 15. DHW Storage Tanks 16. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers, and Louvers 17. Exhaust Fans 18. Zone Dampers 19. VFD's 20. LEED Documentation C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three -ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Provide five sets of submittal data, unless noted otherwise in Division 1. Do not begin work until one (1) copy is returned. D. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4" scale layout drawings of rooms with boilers, chillers, and HVAC equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with electrical equipment, and equipment shall be drawn to scale. E. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the Contractor. F. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the engineer are not change orders. The purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. G. Contractor to provide manufacturers' recommended installation manuals for equipment. H. Review of shop drawings does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing equipment and materials of proper dimension, size, quantity, quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the contract documents. Review does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, advise the MECHANICAL ENGINEER of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-6 PROVISIONS J reasons for the deviations. Coordinate all required changes with the other trades affected. If the changes are occasioned by the Contractor, he shall pay any costs involved. ' 1.16 A. PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. ' B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Architect before proceeding. 1.17 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS ' A. During the process of the work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the mechanical systems. Upon completion of the mechanical systems installation, transfer all record data to blue -line prints of the original drawings. Drawings shall include all addendum items, charge orders, alternations, reroutings, etc. As a condition of acceptance of the project, deliver to the ' Architect one copy of the record drawings. 1.18 WARRANTY A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. ' B. Guarantee all workmanship, materials and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for one year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. ' C. Each warranty for longer than the one year described above (that comes with equipment used on the job) shall be passed on to the owner with dates of start and end of the warranty. ' 1.19 ENGINEERING BY CONTRACTOR A. The construction of this building requires the contractor to design several systems or ' subsystems. All such design shall be the completed responsibility of the contractor. B. Systems or subsystems which require engineering responsibility by the contractor include, but are not limited to: 1. Fire sprinkler. 2. Equipment supports, not fully detailed in the drawings. 3. Pipe hangers and anchors not specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. 4. Temperature controls. 5. Refrigeration systems. 6. Seismic restraints. ' PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 220010-7 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER A. Equipment in the following categories shall be of one manufacturer or available through one manufacturer for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance for the Owner. 1. Motors (open drip -proof squirrel cage) 2. Starters 3. Temperature Controls 4. Plumbing Fixture Trim 5. Thermometers 6. Pressure Gauges 7. Gate Valves 8. Butterfly Valves 9. Plug Valves 10. Globe Valves 11. Check Valves 12. Balancing Valves 13. Radiator Valves 14. Traps 15. Dielectric Unions 16. Strainers 17. Air Filters 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS (PRIOR APPROVALS) A. Bidder's Choice Materials, equipment or services listed by several identifying names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed names may be bid without soliciting prior acceptance. Where more than one name is given in the specifications, the first named manufacturer's material, equipment or services is contemplated and any changes and their costs, required to accommodate the other named material or equipment as well as space requirements for the other named materials or equipment, must be assumed by the Contractor in his bid. (See Shop Drawing Requirement). B. Performance Specification 1. When any product is specified only by requirement to meet an industry standard or regulating body standard (such as U.L., AGA, AWWA, ANSI, etc.) and the item proposed carries approval of that body, no prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed. 2. When any product or service is specified by requirement to meet a performance standard or is specified by a generic specification, (no manufacturers name listed) no prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed except as specifically called for in these specifications. C. Acceptance til PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-8 PROVISIONS 1. Material and equipment specified is used as a basis of standard, and while not specifically ' mentioned, material gauges, weights, appearance and space requirements must be met by any substitutions. 2. Action for substitutions specified herein will be given only after the receipt of complete data showing performance over entire range, physical dimensions and material construction all SPECIFICALLY marked for the individual item. Letter of transmittal with at least one (1) copy and one (1) marked up copy of all descriptive data shall be submitted to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER'S Office. ' 3. Submit shop drawings for all materials and equipment other than the first named in theses specifications showing any changes required in piping, ducting, electrical wiring, space allocation etc. Be responsible to make all changes required to accommodate and to pay ' for these changes. Coordinate changes required with all other trades. Pay for all changes resulting from re- arranging equipment. 4. See General Conditions for method of notification of acceptance. ' 2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND /OR OWNER INITIATED) ' PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 220010-9 A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's ' choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified by a generic spec, (no manufacturer's name listed) no prior approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is needed unless specifically ' called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except ' the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions for Material ' 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such alternate proposals shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be ' accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be deducted for each item and all deviations from specified items. Highlight all difference from specified equipment. If any such alternates are considered, ' the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions shall not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. 2.4 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s) for Material and Equipment ' PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 220010-9 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. M SAFETY PROVISIONS A. Any refrigeration system containing CFC -11, CFC -12, HCFC -123, HCFC -22, or any of the other refrigerants listed in the Clean Air Act as a Class I or Class II Ozone Depleting Compound shall comply with the Clean Air Acts and the Colorado Air Quality Control Commission Regulation #15. B. As a minimum all systems shall be equipped with refrigerant recovery service valves, relief valves capable of resetting after activation, and for system with more than 50 pounds of charge, and isolateable receiver and/or condenser capable of holding the complete charge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STORAGE A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contact limit lines of the building site. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements; any rusted or weather damaged item shall not be used. 3.2 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2. Consult with manufacturer's technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. 3. If a conflict exists, notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. B. Movement of Equipment 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. H F I h'. r- L PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-10 PROVISIONS C. Heavy Equipment ' 1. Coordinate the movement of heavy items with shoring and bracing so that the building structure will not be overloaded during the movement and installation. 2. Where mechanical products to be installed on the existing roof are too heavy to be hand- ' carried, do not transport across the existing roof deck; position by crane or other device so as to avoid overloading the roof deck. ' D. Clearances 1. Insta ' a. b. C. d. ' e. 11 piping and ductwork: Straight and true. Aligned with other work. Close to walls and overhead structure (allowing for insulation). Concealed, where possible, in occupied spaces. Out -of -the -way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. ' 2. Except as otherwise indicated, arrange mechanical services and overhead equipment with a minimum of: a. 7'0" headroom in storage spaces. b. 8'6" headroom in other spaces. 3. Do not obstruct windows, doors or other openings. 4. Give the right -of way to piping systems required to slope for drainage (over other service lines and ductwork). ' 5. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to affect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. ' E. Access 1. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of doors and of access panels. ' 3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. ' PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 220010-11 C. Do not allow any fans in the HVAC system to operate before the area served by the fan has been cleaned and vacuumed of all debris and dust which might enter the system. D. Any equipment, duct or piping systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. E. Initial fill of traps 1. Provide initial water seal fill for all waste p -traps, condensate traps, or similar traps. 3.4 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS A. All temporary water connections shall be made with an approved back flow preventer. B. All hose bibbs shall have, as a minimum, a vacuum breaker to prevent back flow. 3.5 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS A. All technicians involved in the installation of refrigeration systems shall be certified and trained in accordance with the Colorado Air Quality Commission Regulation #15, and the applicable sections of the Clean Air Act. B. No refrigerant shall be intentionally vented to the atmosphere. All refrigerant shall be recovered before opening a closed system for charging, evacuation, service, or installation. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Division 01 sections of the specifications regarding requirements of Record Drawings and Operation and maintenance Manual submittal and systems demonstration. 1. Demonstrate that each system operates properly. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner's Representative. Explain use of O &M manual in operating and maintaining systems. B. Date and time of demonstration will be determined by the Owner. 3.7 ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs and roof flashings for all equipment located on the roof shall be furnished under the Architectural Division (except for any sound curbs or roof top units' integral curbs specified herein). Furnish and install all counter flashing of the same material as the flashing. 3.8 CONCRETE A. All poured in place concrete shall be furnished under the Architectural Divisions of these Specifications. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 220010-12 1 B. This Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete surrounding buried duct. Ducts shall be tied down to concrete deadman and completely surrounded with 3" of concrete. 3.9 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. (MD is Mechanical Division - ED is Electrical Division). a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except that where such items are no integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. ' PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 220010-13 SET IN PLACE OR WIRED AND FURNISHED MOUNTED CONNECTED ITEM UNDER UNDER UNDER 1. Equipment Motors and Thermal MD MD ED overloads, resistance heaters (c). 2. Motor Controllers; magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters and MD ED(a) ED overload relays. 3. Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, H.P. rated switches, ED(a) ED(a) ED thermal overload switches and fuses, manual operating switches. 4. Push -button stations, pilot lights, multi -speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control MD MD(b) MD(b) panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. 5. Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for boiler controls and for fire ED ED ED protection controls and smoke detectors. 6. Duct Detectors, fire /smoke dampers, MD MD ED(c) elevator vent dampers. a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except that where such items are no integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. ' PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 220010-13 1) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. C. The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. 3.10 A. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connectors. IDENTIFICATION Piping 1. All exposed piping, except piping in finished spaces, shall be identified in conformance with "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems ", ANSI A13. All markers must be in compliance with respect to (1) proper letter color, (2) proper letter size, (3) correct background color, and (4) proper marker length. 2. Directional flow arrows shall be applied adjacent to each pipe mark. 3. For pipes under 3/4" O.D. color coded (as described above) identification tags shall be securely fastened at all required locations. Tags shall be 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. 4. All piping shall be marked at the following locations: (1) next to each valve and fitting, (2) at each branch and riser take -off, (3) at each wall, ceiling or floor penetration, (4) on pipes that lead to and from underground areas, and (5) every 30 feet on horizontal and vertical pipe runs. Identification of all piping systems shall conform to the designations in the mechanical legend on the drawings. B. Valves 1. All valves shall be identified by color coded (to match piping system identification) tags which indicate both service and number. Tags shall be 1 -1/2 inch in diameter and have 1/4 inch high letters to indicate service and 7/16 inch high numbers. Tags shall be securely fastened to all valves. Service designations shall match abbreviations for piping systems given in mechanical legend on the drawings. Valve charts shall be provided and shall include (1) valve identification number, (2) service, (3) location, and (4) purpose. Valve charts shall be mounted in metal frame with glass enclosure. One valve chart shall be secured on a wall in the boiler room. A second valve chart shall be delivered to the Owner's authorized representative. Also a copy of the valve chart shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Instructions. C. All electric controls, starters, air handling units, pumps, and all other equipment and controls shall be identified by stencil or permanent labeling. D. Care shall be taken not to paint over nameplates. 3.11 FLUSHING, CLEANING & STERILIZING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-14 PROVISIONS J H_ 0 1. Piping and connection equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. ' 2. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. 3. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems shall be furnished with ' one additional set of filters for owner replacement. 4. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. 5. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that ' are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing ' fixtures ready to use. 6. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. 7. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and ' duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. B. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, blow out all piping with air and then ' wash out with cleaning compounds. Then flush the system to remove of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc, required for this purpose. Clean the boiler and ' chiller by the same procedure. C. Clean the boiler by the same procedure. ' D. After flushing, sterilize the domestic water system in accordance with Section 221116. ' 3.12 TESTING A. Test all drain and waste lines with standing water test of twelve feet of head, held long enough to visually inspect each joint. B. Test all heating water, snowmelt, and reduced pressure domestic water piping at 150 psig hydrostatic pressure before connecting to unit. ' C. Test all domestic water service lines to PRV, fire lines, radiant panel (embedded in concrete) and anti -freeze piping at 200 psig hydro static pressure. D. Test all air, oil and gas piping under 60 psig air pressure. E. Test all refrigeration piping under 150 psig pressure using oil pumped, dry nitrogen and tapping of joints if there is any loss of pressure, soap each joint to find leaks. Charge with 10 psig ' refrigerant and test with halide torch or electronic leak detector. Evacuate using vacuum pump to 500 microns and purge twice with oil pumped, dry nitrogen. ' F. All tests must be done to the satisfaction of the local authorities having jurisdiction, before covering. ' G. All hydrostatic tests to be held for a minimum of six hours without loss of pressure. Air tests to be held for a minimum of two hours without loss of pressure. PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-15 PROVISIONS r H. Furnish all instruments required for testing. 3.13 PLACING IN OPERATION A. Clean all ducts, pipes, equipment, controls etc., of plaster and other foreign debris. B. Before final acceptance, clean or replace all strainers, oil or grease all bearings and clean out all drains. Clean and recoat all permanent filters, replace throwaway type filters with new filters. C. The systems shall be put into operation. The Contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified. a. Example: Boiler operating and limit controls set where specified. 2. The contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequences of control are being met. 3. The contractor to adjust settings through Ist year as required by MECHANICAL ENGINEER. 3.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Books of Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be personally delivered to the Owner's authorized representative and the Owner instructed as to their use and the equipment involved. (Provide two books for each building). Also, instruct the Owner's personnel on each valve and the valve chart previously specified. B. The book shall contain, but not be limited to, the following general items: 1. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment. 2. Operating manuals for each piece of equipment and control. 3. Lubrication charts showing type of lubricant and application methods and frequencies. 4. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 5. Preventive maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drive, safety controls and oil and refrigerant charges. Cleaning schedule of all strainers, traps, coils, tubes, tower pans, sprays, etc. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 6. Water treatment recommendations for boiler, tower, etc. 7. Normal operating instructions including a sequence of operation for each system. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 8. Instructions as to procedure to be followed for any emergency situation, such as alarms or safety items being tripped. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 9. Instructions on who to call for service during guarantee period. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 10. Record of equipment installed (copy of each shop drawing as set forth under "Shop Drawing" Paragraph). 11. All warranties provided by Manufacturers on their equipment that run longer than the one year guarantee by the Contractor. f7 D fl H, D PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-16 PROVISIONS n C. Books shall be arranged in sequence to match the equipment schedules included in the specifications. D. Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction portions have been completed. 3.15 EQUIPMENT START -UP A. All refrigeration, boilers, and packaged equipment shall be started by the manufacturer or under the manufacturer's supervision. Start-up data shall be recorded in logs. Copies of start-up logs shall be forwarded to Mechanical Engineer and included in Operation and Maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION 220010 PLUMBING GENERAL 220010-17 PROVISIONS ' SECTION 220050— PLUMBING BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these specifications. Consult them for further instructions and be governed by the requirements ' thereunder. B. LEED Requirements, Section 018113. ' C. Commissioning Requirements, Section 019113. 1.2 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or ' damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. ' B. All equipment shall have housings suitable for the location installed. C. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifically directed to reuse any existing materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MOTORS A. Furnish ball bearing, squirrel cage, open dripproof, normal starting torque motor of the horsepower and current characteristics specified with thermal overload protection and dustproof and leak proof bearing rings and constructed for use at the altitude where the work is to be ' located. Motors guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEMA Standards. Motors shall be commercially, dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment and selected for quiet operation. Provide motors for V -belt ' drives with a cast iron and steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device and belt guard. Line up motors and drives and place motors and equipment on foundations ready for operation. B. Motors rated 1 horsepower or greater shall be Department of Energy (DOE) approved "energy efficient', meeting the requirements of EP Act 92, and shall meet NEMA 12 -6C full load efficiencies. Where not commercially available, power factors shall be capacitor corrected by equipment manufacturer to at least 90 percent under rated load conditions. ' PLUMBING BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD 220050-1 2.2 STARTERS A. Provide starters of current and capacity ratings to serve the motor intended. All three phase starters to have over current protection on all three legs. On three phase starters furnish a Phase Monitor Control Relay, Time Mark B258B, or A258B, three -phase monitor control relay to open on phase reversal, phase failure or phase under voltage. Phase monitor control relay shall be mounted and wired in the starter enclosure by this contractor. Furnish switches and green running pilot light in starter cover. If pilot lights are specified on control panel, individual starter lights will not be required. B. Provide integral transformer and 120 -volt control circuit on all starters, which are furnished with control circuits. C. Size thermal overload relays for approximately 115% of full load motor current. Switch and fuse units will not be acceptable unless specifically indicated. 2.3 BELT DRIVES A. Provide belt drives with cast iron sheaves, either companion driven sheaves (except for two groove) or fixed pitch sheaves. If fixed pitch sheaves are used, the MECHANICAL ENGINEER reserves the right to direct speed changes be made, if in his opinion, these are warranted after final balancing. Fixed pitch sheaves shall be bushed type. Provide two groove adjustable drive sheaves with a key for holding pitch adjustment. Use standard FHP, A, B, C and D Sections. FHP belt drives may be used for motors less than three horsepower. Select belt sections for drives for three horsepower and over from the following chart: I: 2.4 MOTOR SPEEDS MOTOR SPEEDS HP 1750 1160 HP 1750 1160 a. 3 A A g. 30 C C b.5 A A h. 40 C C c. 7.5 B B i. 50 B or C C d. 10 B B I j. 60 C C e. 15 B C k. 100 C D f. 25 C C 1. 125 C D Provide matched belts sized for 150% of motor schedule horsepower. When A -B sheaves are used, use B Section belts only. ACCESS DOORS A. Provide painted, steel access doors with key lock suitable for the surface in which they are installed and satisfactory to the Architect. Recessed style to accept plaster finish, recessed type to accept acoustical tile, flush panel for drywall or flanged flushed panel for remodeling. In installed in fire rated surface, access door to carry proper rating. E L [l n PLUMBING BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD 220050-2 1 G 2.5 ALTITUDE RATINGS A. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment capacities, air qualities, etc., are adjusted ratings for the elevation of this project as noted on drawings. Manufacturer's ratings shall be adjusted to provide net ratings shown. 2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS A. For steel piping, construct with stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. B. For copper piping, construct with bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. C. Use connectors suitable for minimum 125 psi WSP and 450° and 200 psi WOG and 250 °F. D. Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FREEZE PROTECTION A. Proximity of any equipment component or fluid piping to potential damage from freezing sources shall be avoided wherever possible. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make location adjustments, add insulation and/or control devices and/or heat sources as necessary to prevent or minimize freeze damage potential. The Architect/Engineer will neither guarantee nor be responsible for any consequences of freezing. 3.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Equipment 1. Erect all floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete pads over the complete floor area of the equipment. 2. Where inertia bases are indicated, pour these bases within structural channel frames having mountings attached to the inside perimeter and furnished with supplementary spring units. Furnish bases with an 18 gauge sheet metal bottom welded in place to retain the concrete. Anchor bolts and reinforcing bars are to be set in the field, #5 reinforcing bars top and bottom, 12" o.c. both ways. Provide one #5 bar at corners, top and bottom, 2'x 2' long. The mounting housing shall have concrete anchors and form enclosures for the spring elements. No damping material shall be used between the inner and outer housing on mountings and mountings shall have a combination lifting and leveling adjustment and 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical friction pads bonded to the steel base. 3. Mount base mounted pumps and compressors (including temperature control compressors) on inertia base with a weight equal to not less than 1 -1/2 times the combined weight of the pump and motor. Each inertia base for horizontally split case pumps shall include supports for base elbows at the suction and discharge connections. Where the concrete is "T" shaped, or other than rectangular, mounting shall be self contained concrete inserts with flush openings on the side of the foundation for spring adjustment or removal. ' PLUMBING BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD 220050-3 r- 4. Mount supply and return centrifugal fans, cabinet fans and air handling units (where called for on plans) on inertia base with a weight equal to not less than 1 -1/2 times the combined weight of the fan and motor. Where centrifugal fan is used, mount fan and motor on common steel base. 5. Support each air or refrigeration compressor, (including temperature control compressor) base mounted pump, factory assembled air handing unit and fan by Mason Industries or equivalent spring type vibration isolators, as follows: 6. All mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. B. Piping 1. Compressors a. Isolate all refrigerant piping from the structure throughout by double deflection spring and neoprene hangers with 1" deflection. Hang piping so that it does not touch any part of the structure. Connect pipes to compressor or condensing unit with convoluted bellows braided metallic flexible pipe connectors. 2. Domestic Hot and Cold Water, Heating Water and Waste Piping PLUMBING BASIC 220050-4 MATERIAL AND METHOD GROUND SUPPORTED 20' FLOOR SPAN SLAB OR BASEMENT POSSIBLE FLOOR DEFL EQUIPMENT MASON 0.67" MASON Min Static Min Static Engr. Sec Defl. in. En r. Spec. Defl. in. a. Refrigeration Machines 1) Refrigeration Reciprocating Compressors a) 500 RPM to 750 RPM B 0.75 B 1.5 b 751 RMP and over B 0.75 B 0.75 b. Factory Assembled H & V Units 1) Floor Mounted Units a Thru 5 HP A 0.35 B -H 0.75 c. Blowers 1) Centrifugal Blowers A -J .035 B -J 2) Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans a) Suspended Units D Refer to Guide. b) Floor Mounted w/Motor on/in Fan Casing A 0.35 B -J c) Floor Mounted Arrangement 1 or any Separately Mounted Motor A -J 0.35 B 0.75 d. Condensing Units A 0.35 C 6. All mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. B. Piping 1. Compressors a. Isolate all refrigerant piping from the structure throughout by double deflection spring and neoprene hangers with 1" deflection. Hang piping so that it does not touch any part of the structure. Connect pipes to compressor or condensing unit with convoluted bellows braided metallic flexible pipe connectors. 2. Domestic Hot and Cold Water, Heating Water and Waste Piping PLUMBING BASIC 220050-4 MATERIAL AND METHOD 1 3.3 C I a. Domestic hot and cold water piping one inch diameter and smaller shall be isolated with the Acousto -Plumb System of orange and blue pipe isolators, holders, and guide, as manufactured by LSP /Specialty Products Company, Tel (800) 854 -3215. b. Isolate waste piping and domestic hot and cold water piping larger than one inch in diameter with Trisolator system of pipe isolators as manufactured by Elmdor /Stoneman, Tel. (818) 968 -8699. C. Do not allow the piping, pipe connectors, pipe hangers or valve to directly touch the structure, studs, gypsum board, or other pipes. d. Copper waste piping must be completely wrapped with Lowry's acoustical pipe wrap. The wrap is manufactured by Harry A. Lowry, Tel. (818) 768 -4661. C. Flexible Connections Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. PIPE HANGERS A. General 1. Provide pipe supports for vertical lines at each floor. Provide pipe hangers to support the systems without sagging, including hangers at each offset or change in direction, at ends of branches over five feet in length and at the following maximum spacing: Pipe Size Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter(Minimum a. 3/4" and smaller 6 ft. 3/8" b. 1" 8 ft. 3/8" c. 1 -1/4" through 2" 10 ft. 3/8" d. 2 -1/2" through 3" 10 ft. 1/2" e. 4" through 5" 10 ft. 1/2" f. 6" through 10" 2 ft 5/8" g. 12" and larger 12 ft. 7/8" h. Cast iron no hub 5 ft. and at joints B. Individual Hangers 1. Individual hangers for non - insulated copper piping and insulated copper heating piping and insulated domestic hot water and circulating water piping shall be copper plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip 500, Kin -Line felt lined 440 -F or Michigan Hanger Company Series 102 with polyvinyl coating, with insulation over hangers. 2. Individual hangers for insulated cold piping (steel or copper) shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 800, Kin Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 103. Hangers shall support pipe with hangers over the insulation. The ' PLUMBING BASIC 220050-5 MATERIAL AND METHOD system shall be complete with Auto Grip or Michigan Zinc plated steel shield, Pipe Shields or Kin -Line 460 zinc plated steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density glass fiber or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 3. Individual hangers for all insulated or non - insulated steel piping (except steam and high temperature hot water) shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 400, Kin -Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 100. Hangers shall support pipe with insulation over hangers. C. Trapeze Hangers 1. Parallel runs of piping may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze shall be Unistrut P- 1000-3 or Kin Line 211, 371 or 372 equivalent by Elcen or Kindorff. System shall be selected to support five times the weight of thrust applied without failure. 2. All non - insulated steel pipe and insulated steel heating water pipe shall have standard pipe straps at each support. 3. All non - insulated copper pipe, insulated copper domestic hot and re- circulating water piping and insulated copper heating piping shall rest on neoprene sleeves and have standard pipe straps at each support. 4. All cold insulated pipe (steel or copper) shall rest on Fee and Mason Figure 81 or equivalent by unistrut, or Kin -Line, galvanized steel insulation shield or 360 galvanized steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density fiber glass or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. Provide pipe strap over insulation at each support. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 3.4 CONTROL VALVE PIPING A. If the control valve size is smaller than the pipe size marked on the drawing, the reduction in size pertains to the valve only. Gate valves, globe valves, and strainers on either side of the automatic valve shall be a minimum of the pipe size marked on the drawings. 3.5 PUMP CONNECTIONS A. Where the suction or discharge of any pump unit is smaller than the pipe size noted on the drawings, all strainers, valves, flexible connections, expansion joints, etc., shall be a minimum of the pipe size noted on the drawings. 3.6 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing chases and pipe riser chases. Access doors assembly to be minimum size of 16" x 16 ". B. Also, furnish access doors in all non - removable ceilings and in partitions and walls where necessary to maintain access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual PLUMBING BASIC 220050-6 MATERIAL AND METHOD dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required for access. C. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for him to construct into the building. I D. Submit shop drawing indicating the locations of all access doors. 3.7 WELDING A. Provide all welding in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or other approved procedure conforming to the requirements of the ASME ' Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. Only welders who have been fully qualified under the specified procedure shall be employed. ' 3.8 PIPE DEPTHS ' A. Interior pipe below slabs shall be a minimum of 4 inches below slab and shall not be in contact with concrete at any point. Minimum exterior cover over water piping, unless otherwise shown or required by code, shall be 8 feet above the top of the pipe. Area drains shall have maximum cover possible consistent with finished landscape and acceptable flow lines. Gas piping shall have minimum of 3 foot cover with warning tape 12" above pipe. Sanitary waste and storm drain lines shall have 3 foot cover minimum. ' 3.9 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Full- length pipe in longest lengths possible shall be used. All threads shall be right hand, pipe ' standard, clean cut, full depth and tapering. Install piping so as to permit complete draining. Provide drains at all low points. All interior soil, waste and condensate lines shall have uniform pitch in the direction of flow of not less than 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise noted. Ream out all pipe ends, turn on ends and rattle before installing. 3.10 DUCTS A. Construct straight and smooth with neatly finished joints, airtight and free from vibration. Internal ends of slip joints shall be made in the direction of flow. Changes in duct dimensions ' and shape shall be gradual and uniform. Curved elbows, unless otherwise noted, to have centerline radius of at least 1 -1/2 times the duct width. Air turns shall be installed in all abrupt elbows and shall be arranged to permit air to make turns without appreciable turbulence and to remain quiet when the system is in operation. Construction of ducts shall be per the details and recommendations of the latest edition of the ASHRAE handbook and U.M.C. The most stringent requirement governs in conflicts. "Duct mate" joint method may be utilized provided all portions of seam/joint materials are provided by "duct mate" and installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's standards. ' PLUMBING BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD 220050-7 0 3.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.12 CLEANING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. Refer also to Division 01 specifications. B. Piping and connected equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. C. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. D. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems with disposable filters shall be furnished with one additional set of boxed filters for owner replacement. E. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. F. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. G. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. H. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. 3.13 EXPANSION COMPENSATION AND SEISMIC PROTECTION A. Examine piping layout and provide anchors or expansion joints required to adequately protect system. B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. PLUMBING BASIC 220050-8 MATERIAL AND METHOD H i �Ii n L I C. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and ' contraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, and provide corrugated bellows type expansion joints where required. D. Provide seismic bracing as required by code for all ducts, piping and equipment. 3.14 SLEEVES, CUTTING, PATCHING A. Major openings in the structure for mechanical work may be shown on the structural drawings; these will be done under the Architectural Division of these Specifications. It is the Contractor's responsibility to set necessary sleeves and boxes for pipe and ducts (not shown on the structural drawings) before erection of structure. This Contractor is responsible for the correct size and location of all openings including coordination with the other trades. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve. B. In mechanical equipment room floors, all pipe sleeves to the Schedule 40 pipe and shall extend 1" above finished floor. In mechanical equipment room floors, all ducts shall have a 4" high concrete curb around duct. C. Caulk all pipes and ducts leaving equipment rooms between sleeve and duct or pipe, V deep on each side of wall, floor, or roof. Caulk bare pipes and ducts with lead wool. Caulk insulated pipes with 1- or 2 -part polysulphide caulking compound. D. In the same manner as described in Paragraph C above, caulk all other pipes and ducts throughout the building which penetrate walls and floors and roofs this includes pipe and ducts to rooftop units. E. All pipes which may be in view shall be finished with chrome floor, wall and ceiling plates, except in equipment rooms. 3.15 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation, trenching, bedding of pipe, placement and cover, backfilling, etc., in conjunction ' with work under this Division, shall be per requirements of Division 2 and the additional requirements specified herein. B. Trenches: Slope bottoms uniformly to drain. Trench bottoms to be firm, free from large rocks or boulders, or shall have concrete cradles placed to support piping. Cradles to bear on undisturbed soil. ' C. Cast iron: Place on firm trench bottom shaped to accept hubs. Both hubs and pipe shall have uniform firm bearing. Place a minimum of 12 inches of loose rock -free material over pipe. D. Other piping, conduits, culverts: Place on firm trench bottom and backfill per Division 2, 22, and 23 or embed per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Expansion: Place pipe fittings and thrust blocks per manufacturer's recommendations and/or ' project specifications. ' PLUMBING BASIC 220050-9 MATERIAL AND METHOD C F. Excavation: Provide all excavating and backfilling required by the work in this division, all as required by the rules of the State Department of Labor and Equipment. All pipe must be laid on solid earth with bellholes provided for hubs. After pipe is laid in trench, it shall be tested, insulated if specified, and backfilled. G. Compaction 1. Backfill by hand around the pipe and the first 12" over the top of the pipe. Moisten, backfill, and tamp in 8" layers (maximum) with air motor or gasoline driven tamper to consolidate to 90% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content. (Puddling will not be allowed). 2. Trenches under road surfacing shall have the upper 6" layer, forming the subgrade for pavement compacted to at least 95% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content for rigid pavements. 3. Density of backfill shall be determined by the requirements of the A.A.S.H.O. in Pamphlet 57. Standard Method T- 99 -57. 4. Where requirements of the general conditions are more stringent than the above, the general condition requirements shall be met. H. Pavement Accomplish cutting of flexible pavement so that the remaining exposed edge of the pavement conforms vertically and horizontally to a straight line. The width of the section of pavement removed shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of pipe, but shall not exceed 36 ". Waste material resulting from the above operations will be disposed of in suitable waste areas. Repair pavement to satisfaction of the authorities having jurisdiction. Shoring Provide all shoring required to perform the excavation and to protect the project, employees, and public. Surveying Establish all lines, grades and elevations. Stake out the work and furnish all lines, stakes (1" x 2" x 10 "), and all hubs or hardwood pegs (1" x 1" x 6 ") to stake out the lines and structures to line and grade. K. Maintaining and Protecting Traffic Maintain sufficient barricades, warning signals and lights to protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Provide and maintain such detours as may be necessary to keep traffic moving during construction. L. Surface Drainage and Ground Water Surface drainage shall be diverted away from open excavation and trenching before commencement of work at the location. Surface water on ground water seepage, which enters or accumulates in the trenches, shall be removed by pumping or subdraining, and the subgrade or pipe bed restored to original bearing value and conditions. J I J D H C 0 PLUMBING BASIC 220050-10 MATERIAL AND METHOD M. Any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the warranty period shall be repaired without expense to the Owner, including the complete restoration of all damaged property. 3.16 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Furnish and install as indicated on the plans and/or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Contractor shall be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout between the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment inertia bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement. B. Furnish all hangers, anchors, sway bracing, guides, etc., for the various piping and duct systems as required for their proper installation. END OF SECTION 220050 PLUMBING BASIC 220050-11 MATERIAL AND METHOD SECTION 220080 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, duct, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Calcium silicate. b. Cellular glass. C. Flexible elastomeric. d. Mineral fiber. e. Polyisocyanurate. 2. Adhesives. 3. Mastics. 4. Lagging adhesives. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory- applied jackets. 7. Field- applied jackets. 8. Tapes. 9. Securements. 10. Corner angles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ASJ: All- service jacket. B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper. C. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene. D. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride. E. SSL: Self - sealing lap. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), and flame spread and smoke developed indices. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-1 E B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following: 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Application of field - applied jackets. 7. Application at linkages of control devices. 8. Field application for each equipment type. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame- spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame- spread index of 75 or less, and smoke - developed index of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." n B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field - applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-2 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Calcium Silicate: 1. Products: a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo -12 Gold. 2. Preformed. Pipe Sections: Flat -, curved -, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non - asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 3. Flat -, curved -, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non - asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. r t PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-3 4. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. _ G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. Cell -U -Foam Corporation; Ultra -CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special- Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory- Applied ASJ -SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded - rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. C. RBX Corporation; Insul -Sheet 1800 and Insul -Tube 180. I. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. C. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All- Service Duct Wrap. �1 J. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory- applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation without factory- applied jacket. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-4 C. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin -Glas. ' d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Coming; Fiberglas 700 Series. K. High - Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory- applied jacket. 1. Products: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin -Glas. C. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt. L. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro -Lok. C. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley -K. e. Owens Coming; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory- applied ASJ -SSL. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. M.' Mineral- Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory- applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb /cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k- value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. ' 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrnnpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. ' C. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. N. Polyisocyanurate: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular polyisocyanurate material intended for use as thermal insulation. Products: I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-5 L a. Apache Products Company; ISO -25. P P b. Dow Chemical Company (The); Trymer. C. Duna USA Inc.; Corafoam. d. Elliott Company; Elfoam. e. 2. Comply with ASTM C 591, Type I or Type IV, except thermal conductivity (k- value) shall not exceed 0.19 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F after 180 days of aging. 3. Flame- spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke - developed index shall be 50 or less for thickness up to 1 -1/2 inches as tested by ASTM E 84. 4. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 5. Factory- Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. a. Pipe Applications: PVDC -SSL. b. Equipment Applications: PVDC -SSL. 2.3 I•� C. C ADHESIVES Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium- silicate -based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -97. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81- 27/81 -93. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 760. Cellular -Glass and Polyisocyanurate Adhesive: Solvent -based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -33. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. C. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-6 E. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; 5- 90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. F. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22- 25.ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S- 90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25. G. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns - Manville; Zeston Perma -Weld, CEEL -TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. C. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C- 19565C, Type II. B. Vapor - Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -90. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-7 k' 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C. Vapor - Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -30. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -35. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -25. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -10. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. D. Vapor - Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60- 95/60 -96. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -70. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -10. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35 -00. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB- 05/15. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -50. f. Vimasco Corporation; WC- 1/WGS. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625 -inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-8 r 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL- A -3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -42. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 11 -30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 2. Fire - resistant, water -based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire - resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular - Glass, Phenolic -Foam, and Polyisocyanurate Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -45. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittsea1444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76 -8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95 -44. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water - resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-9 H I C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water - resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 2.7 FACTORY - APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory- applied jackets on various applications. When factory- applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft- paper, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ -SSL: ASJ with self - sealing, pressure- sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame- spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame - spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 7. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self - sealing, pressure- sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 8. Vinyl Jacket: UL -rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 2.8 FIELD - APPLIED JACKETS A. Field- applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. I r r n u H B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum- foil -face, fiberglass - reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-10 r C. PVC Jacket: High- impact - resistant, UV- resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field - applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. C. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory- fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90- degree, short- and long - radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap and supply covers for lavatories. 5. Factory- fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. D. Metal Jacket: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. C. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul -Mate. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H -14. a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field- applied jacket schedules. C. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1 -mil- thick, heat - bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3- mil - thick, heat - bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. e. Factory- Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2 -piece or gore, 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory- fabricated fitting covers are not available. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-11 E. Underground Direct -Buried Jacket: 125 -mil thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven -glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. 1. Products: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap. b. Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125. F. Self- Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60- mil - thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum -foil facing. 1. Products: a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60. G. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame- spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film. H. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame - spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. I. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self - sealing, pressure- sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. 2.9 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor - retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus /SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-12 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force /inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor - retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW /SQ. e. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force /inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf /inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor - retarder tape matching field - applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force /inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf /inch in width. D. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor - retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force /inch in width. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-13 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf /inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. C. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor - Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc - coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor - discharge welding, 0.106 - inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-14 F, 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 341bf /inch in width. E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor - retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 4 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf /inch in width. F. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor - retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf /inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. C. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor - Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc - coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor - discharge welding, 0.106 - inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-14 F, t 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. Cupped -Head, Capacitor - Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc - coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor - discharge welding, 0.106- inch - diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1 -1/2 -inch galvanized carbon -steel washer. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul- Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. C. Spindle: Copper- or zinc - coated, low carbon steel], fully annealed, 0.106 -inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers. ' b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. C. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106- inch - diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2 -1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. ' PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-15 5. Self - Sticking -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul- Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. C. Spindle: Copper- or zinc- coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive- backed base with a peel -off protective cover. 6. Insulation - Retaining Washers: Self - locking washers formed from 0.016- inch - thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC -150. 2) GEMCO; R -150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA -150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self - locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 7. Nonmetal Insulation - Retaining Washers: Self - locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward - clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4- inch -wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062 -inch soft - annealed, stainless steel. J 1. Manufacturers: a. ACS Industries, Inc. b. C & F Wire. C. Childers Products. d. PABCO Metals Corporation. e. RPR Products, Inc. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-16 k 2.11 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H -14. C. Stainless -Steel Comer Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304 or 316. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation. 3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-17 P F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 1. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor - barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor - barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory- applied jackets as follows: Draw jacket tight and smooth. Cover circumferential joints with 3- inch -wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self - sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor - barrier mastic over staples. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to r maintain vapor seal. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor - barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-18 0 P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration - control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. ' 3.3 PENETRATIONS ' A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, ' install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. ' 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Below -Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush ' with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation ' continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. ' 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-19 I 3.4 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor - discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor - discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. 3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secured comer angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self - sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME - labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that is compatible with service temperature and with substrate. C. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor -pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. 6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing H H D H PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-20 k. n J i insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. B. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box. joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6 -inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8- inch - diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. 2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least .040 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. 3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor - retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-21 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor - barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric - reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well- shaped contour. For services not specified to receive a field - applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers as necessary. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless - steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two -part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field- applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. r 4'. fl H111 HI 0 0 n PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-22 3.7 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Boiler Breechings and Ducts: 1. Secure single -layer insulation with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation material. 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, fmish insulation surface with a skim coat of mineral- fiber, hydraulic- setting cement. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply fmish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform fmish. B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure single -layer insulation with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. Apply a skim coat of mineral- fiber, hydraulic- setting cement to insulation surface. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply fmish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. 3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation. E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation. I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-23 3.8 CELLULAR -GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor - barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular -glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular -glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular -glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.9 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-24 J 1 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: ' 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when ' available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to ' surface being insulated. ' 3.10 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. ' 4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor - barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. ' 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-25 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor - discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor - discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward- clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor - barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor - barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor - barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped it HI u 0 u k 0 J PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-26 �I pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. ' At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch -wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. ' 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward - clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor - barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. ' a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor - barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot ' intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor - barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-27 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor - discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor - discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as ' follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. ' C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. ' 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward - clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor - barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. ' a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor - barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot ' intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor - barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-27 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch -wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.11 POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe. For insulation with factory- applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor - barrier mastic. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor - barrier system. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1 -1/2 -inch thickness. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyisocyanurate block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. C. Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows: Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of polyisocyanurate insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.12 FIELD - APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION r i 0 e G n A. Where glass -cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory- applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2 -inch overlap at seams and joints. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-28 1 B. t 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062- inch -thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1 -1/2 -inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3 -inch -wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor - retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor - barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-29 E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. ' 2. Wrap factory- presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1 -1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33 -1/2 inches or less. The 33- 1 /2- inch - circumference limit allows for 2- inch - overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1 -1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges. I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-29 C 3.13 FINISHES A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass - Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex- emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless -steel jackets. 3.14 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Supply, return and outdoor air. Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous -glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 do not require an additional duct wrap. 3. Factory- insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory- insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration - control devices. 7. Factory- insulated access panels and doors. 3.15 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat -oval, supply air, return air and outdoor -air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 1 -1/2 inches thick and 0.75- lb /cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 1 -1/2 inches thick and 2- lb /cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Duct Liner: Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork B. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat -oval exhaust -air duct insulation between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior shall be one of the following: �J PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-30 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 1 -1/2 inches thick and 0.75- 1b /cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 1 -1/2 inches thick and 2- lb /cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Duct Liner: Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork. C. Exposed, rectangular, round and flat -oval, supply air, return air, exhaust air and outdoor -air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 1 -1/2 inches thick and 0.75- lb /cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 1 -1 /2 inches thick and 2- lb /cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Duct Liner: Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork 3.16 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Ductwork installed in cold attic above insulation is considered outdoor ductwork. C. Concealed or exposed rectangular, round and flat -oval, supply air, return air, exhaust air and outdoor -air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 3 inches thick and 1.5- lb /cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 3 inches thick and 3- lb /cu. ft. nominal density. 3.17 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Heat - exchanger (water -to -water for heating service) insulation shall be the following: 1. Calcium Silicate: 3 inches thick. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2- lb /cu. ft. nominal density. D. Heating- hot -water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. E. Heating- hot -water air - separator insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. F. Domestic hot -water storage tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 4 inches thick. I PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-31 G. Thermal storage tank brine water, ice insulation shall be of the following: g � ) Y 1. Cellular Glass: 4 inches thick. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 3 inches thick and 2- lb /cu. ft. nominal density. 3.18 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Fire - suppression piping. 2. Below -grade piping. 3. Chrome- plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.19 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. C. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. 2. NPS 1 -1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: 1. NPS 1 -1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inchthick. C. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. C. Stormwater and Overflow: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. D. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-32 t a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. E. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. b. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. F. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: (' a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 -1/2 inches thick. G. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. C. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. H. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet of Drain Receiving Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. C. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. 1. Heating- Hot -Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: 1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick. 2. NPS 14 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I Pipe and Tank Insulation: 1 -1/2 inches thick. J. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: ' PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-33 P a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. C. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. K. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. L. Engine Exhaust Piping and Silencer, All Pipe Sizes: Calcium silicate, 4 inches thick. 3.20 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. C. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type 1: 2 inches thick. A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. C. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type 1: 2 inches thick. B. Engine Exhaust Piping and Silencer, All Pipe Sizes: Calcium silicate, 4 inches thick. C. Fire - Suppression Piping Filled with Water: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Polyisocyanurate: 2 inches thick. 3.21 OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Loose -fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections. B. Sanitary Waste Piping, All Sizes, Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Cellular glass, 2 inches thick. C. Heating- Hot -Water Supply and Return, All Sizes, 200 Deg F and below: Cellular glass, 3 inches thick. f PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-34 F 3.22 INDOOR, FIELD - APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory- applied jacket, install the field- applied jacket over the factory- applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Smooth with 1 -1/4 -Inch Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inch thick. E. Piping, Concealed: 1. None. 2. PVC: 20 mils thick. F. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. 3.23 OUTDOOR, FIELD - APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory- applied jacket, install the field - applied jacket over the factory- applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch thick. D. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z- Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick. E. Piping, Exposed: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z- Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick. 3.24 UNDERGROUND, FIELD - INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET A. For underground direct - buried piping applications, install underground direct - buried jacket over insulation material. PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-35 END OF SECTION 220080 D k. H-1 0 u PLUMBING INSULATION 220080-36 !l � I SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 5. Housed spring mounts. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Spring hangers. 8. Spring hangers with vertical -limit stops. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Restraining braces and cables. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic - Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: Per Structural Documents. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: Per Structural Documents a. Component Importance Factor: Per Structural Documents b. Component Response Modification Factor: Per Structural Documents C. Component Amplification Factor: Per Structural Documents 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): Per Structural Documents. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1- Second Period: Per Structural Documents. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Delegated - Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic - restraint calculations and details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. ' VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548-1 LJ 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality- control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic- restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Seismic - restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC -ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic - restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic - restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber /Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Pads : Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water - resistant rubber. C. Mounts : Double - deflection type, with molded, oil- resistant rubber, hermetically sealed VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 220548-2 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1 1 G compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory- drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. Materials: Cast - ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. Neoprene: Shock - absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge - bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. D. Restrained Mounts : All- directional mountings with seismic restraint. 1. Materials: Cast - ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock - absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge - bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. E. Spring Isolators : Freestanding, laterally stable, open - spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4- inch - thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. F. Restrained Spring Isolators : Freestanding, steel, open- spring isolators with seismic or limit - stop restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory- drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4 -inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit -stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. G. Housed Spring Mounts : Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile -iron or steel housing to provide all- directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 220548-3 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4 -inch travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar. H. Elastomeric Hangers : Single or double - deflection type, fitted with molded, oil- resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. I. Spring Hangers : Combination coil- spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel - washer - reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self- centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. Spring Hangers with Vertical -Limit Stop : Combination coil - spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical -limit stop. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up- stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self - centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support : All - directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch- thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical -limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions. L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection r I H u fl D H-11 u u VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 220548-4 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 0 of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. 1 2.2 SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amber /Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti, Inc. ' 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 7. Mason Industries. 8. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 9. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. ' B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of ' components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. � I C. Channel Support System: MFMA -3, shop- or field- fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion - resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized -steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted- support- system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. F. Bushings for Floor- Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs. G. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One - piece, molded, oil- and water - resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. H. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled -in and stud -wedge or female -wedge type in zinc - coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter. ' VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548-5 I1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic- Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.2 VIBRATION- CONTROL AND SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches. 2. Install seismic - restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. B. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP -127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install seismic - restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor - mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. G. Drilled -in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved L H1__ 0 u 0 7 u VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 220548-6 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 7 P I � t full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy -duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc - coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load - spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548-7 C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 220548-8 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Specialty valves. 2. Flexible connectors. 3. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor. 4. Water meters. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE /SEI 7. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality- control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF -pw" on piping. C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. PIPING MATERIALS Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. 1. Cast - Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B 16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought- Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B 16.22, wrought- copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast - copper - alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball -and- socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends. 5. Copper Pressure -Seal -Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought - copper fitting with EPDM - rubber O -ring seal in each end. C. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Cast - bronze or wrought- copper fitting with EPDM - rubber O- ring seal in each end. 6. Copper Push -on -Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) NVent LLC. b. Description: Cast - copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought - copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless -steel teeth and EPDM - rubber O -ring seal in each end instead of solder joint ends. LV Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B 16.22, wrought- copper pressure fittings. 2. Copper Pressure -Seal -Joint Fittings: I 0 0 a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-2 r� limited to, the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought - copper fitting with EPDM - rubber O -ring seal in each end. C. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Cast - bronze or wrought - copper fitting with EPDM- rubber O- ring seal in each end. 2.3 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end ' unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Standard - Pattern, Push -on -Joint Fittings: AWWA C 110, ductile or gray iron. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 2. Compact- Pattern, Push -on -Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 2.4 GALVANIZED -STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Galvanized -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Standard Weight. Include ends matching joining method. 1. Galvanized -Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. 2. Galvanized, Gray -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. 3. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal -stock body with ball -and- socket, metal -to- metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends. 4. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125, cast iron. 2.5 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS A. PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing. 1. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal - insert type with copper or stainless -steel crimp rings and matching PEX tube dimensions. 2. Manifold: Multiple - outlet, plastic or corrosion- resistant -metal assembly complying with ASTM F 877; with plastic or corrosion- resistant -metal valve for each outlet. 2.6 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-3 i B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full -face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe -Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for general - duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. E. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general -duty metal valves. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers. 2.8 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. B. Sleeve -Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219. 2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description: a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F. b. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Description: a. Factory- fabricated, bolted, companion -flange assembly. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. C. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder- C DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-4 J joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric -Flange Kits: 1. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. C. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Description: a. Electroplated steel nipple. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. C. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Bronze -Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated - bronze tubing with bronze wire -braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. 1. Working - Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain -end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy. B. Stainless -Steel -Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless -steel wire -braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 1. Working - Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel -pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple. 2.11 WATER METERS A. Displacement -Type Water Meters: 1. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C700. b. Pressure Rating: 150 -psig working pressure. C. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility. e. Case: Bronze. f. End Connections: Threaded. I DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-5 B. Compound -Type Water Meters: 1. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C702. b. Pressure Rating: 150 -psig working pressure. C. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze. f. Pipe Connections: Flanged. C. Remote Registration System: Direct - reading type complying with AWWA C706 ; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low - voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly as required by utility company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK r� J H. D A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install shutoff valve, hose -end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers. D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. E. Install water - pressure- reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure- reducing valves. F. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. G. Rough -in domestic water piping for water -meter installation according to utility company's requirements. H. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic - restraint DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-6 J devices. I i I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. L. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. M. Install piping to permit valve servicing. N. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. O. Install piping free of sags and bends. P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Q. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees. R. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. S. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages. T. Install thermostats in hot -water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats. U. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." I DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-7 � I 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter. E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Pressure- Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure -seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. G. Copper- Tubing, Push -on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth. �I P fl HI H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos -free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. I. PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807. J. Dissimilar- Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General -Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." HI k- DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-8 J 1. Hose -End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop - and -Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose -end drain valves where indicated. '' D. Install balancing valve in each hot -water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball ' valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves. 3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water PipingNPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic -to -metal transition fittings or unions. 3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges. 3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION A. Install bronze -hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing. B. Install stainless- steel -hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping. 3.8 WATER METER INSTALLATION A. Rough -in domestic water piping , and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. B. Water meters will be finnished and installed by utility company. C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements. D. Install displacement -type water meters with shutoff valve on water -meter inlet. Install valve on water -meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Install compound -type water meters with shutoff valves on water -meter inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. F. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of authorities having jurisdiction. I DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-9 3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic - restraint devices. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1 -1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1 -1/2: 108 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3 -1/2: 12 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. I. Install vinyl- coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. J. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches. K. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. I DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-10 1 1 I r_1 t �1 3.10 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water - service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water - service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold -water inlet and hot -water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot -water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot -water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3.11 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation. B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Piping Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-11 fl C. Piping Tests: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.13 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable and non - potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water /chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water /chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. C. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. I H. HI HI fl F, HI C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. I DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-12 i� 3.14 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Galvanized -steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder joint fittings; and brazed joints. 3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure - sealed joints. 4. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper push-on-joint fittings; and push -on joints. 5. PEX Tube, NPS 1 and smaller; fittings for PEX tube; and crimped joints. D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder joint fittings; and brazed joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure - sealed joints. 3. Galvanized -steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 4. Galvanized -steel pipe; grooved joint, galvanized - steel -pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints. 3.15 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. Hot -Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose -end drain valves. B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment. C. Iron grooved -end valves may be used with grooved -end piping. END OF SECTION 221116 ' DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-13 SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure- reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Temperature - actuated water mixing valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Hose bibbs. 8. Wall hydrants. 9. Drain valves. 10. Water hammer arresters. 11. Trap -seal primer valves. B. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality - control test reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-1 domestic water piping components. 2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9." PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pipe - Applied, Atmospheric -Type Vacuum Breakers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. C. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e. Rain Bird Corporation. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Chrome plated. B. Hose- Connection Vacuum Breakers : 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Cash Acme. C. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Legend Valve. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Prier Products, Inc. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Woodford Manufacturing Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 4. Outlet Connection: Garden -hose threaded complying with ASME 131.20.7. r DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-2 U 5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Intermediate Atmospheric -Vent Backflow Preventers : 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. C. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Legend Valve. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1012. 3. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 6. Finish: Rough bronze. B. Reduced - Pressure- Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. C. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. ' f Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. ,i 8. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate -type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2- 1/2 and larger. b. Air -Gap Fitting: ASME A 112.1.2, matching backflow - preventer connection. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-3 k � I fl Double -Check Backflow- Prevention Assemblies <Insert drawing designation if any >: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. C. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 8. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate -type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2- 1 /2 and larger. I� Backflow - Preventer Test Kits <Insert drawing designation if any >: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 0 H u 0 fl a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. C. Flomatic Corporation. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2.3 A. 2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test - procedure instructions. WATER PRESSURE - REDUCING VALVES Water Regulators : 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cash Acme. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-4 0 b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. C. Honeywell Water Controls. t d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1003. 3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig. 4. Body: Bronze with chrome- plated finish for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3. 5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3. 2.4 BALANCING VALVES A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red -White Valve Corp. 2. Standard: MSS SP -110 for two- piece, copper -alloy ball valves. 3. Pressure Rating: 400 -psig minimum CWP. 4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. 5. Body: Copper alloy. 6. Port: Standard or full port. 7. Ball: Chrome- plated brass. 8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 10. Handle: Vinyl- covered steel with memory- setting device. 2.5 TEMPERATURE- ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES A. Water - Temperature Limiting Devices: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Cash Acme. C. Conbraco Industries, Inc. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-5 n d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Legend Valve. f. Leonard Valve Company. g. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. h. Symmons Industries, Inc. i. Taco, Inc. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 1'' 2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion - resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded[ union] inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold -water supplies, and adjustable, temperature - control handle. 8. Valve Finish: Rough bronze. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. C. Leonard Valve Company. d. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. e. Symmons Industries, Inc. 2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Type: Cabinet -type, thermostatically controlled water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion - resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold -water supplies, and adjustable, temperature - control handle. 8. Valve Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Valve Finish: Rough bronze. 10. Piping Finish: Copper. 11. Cabinet: Factory- fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed mounting and with hinged, stainless -steel door. D J f! D J 2.6 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y- Pattern Strainers : 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or FDA - approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES f� 221119-6 1 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. ' 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch. ' b. Strainers NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch. C. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch. 6. Drain: Factory - installed, hose -end drain valve. 2.7 HOSE BIBBS A. Hose Bibbs : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. ' h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed - outlet, self - draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. I DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-7 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. ' 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose - connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze. ' 10. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 11. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle. 12. Include operating key with each operating -key hose bibb. 1 13. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel - plated hose bibb. 2.8 WALL HYDRANTS A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. ' h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed - outlet, self - draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. I DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-7 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1. 7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 8. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover. 9. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 10. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 11. Nozzle and Wall -Plate Finish: Rough bronze. 12. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant. Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. C. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay. R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. 2.9 2. Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B. 3. Type: Freeze - resistant, automatic draining with integral air -inlet valve. 4. Classification: Type B, for automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed. 5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 6. Operation: Loose key or wheel handle. 7. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. 8. Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4. 9. Outlet: Exposed with garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. DRAIN VALVES A. Ball -Valve -Type, Hose -End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP -110 for standard -port, two -piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400 -psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome- plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl- covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES f'. �1 `I 1 H_ J 7 d 221119-8 1 and cap with brass chain. 2.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water Hammer Arresters <Insert drawing designation if any >: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. C. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI -WH 201. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI -WH 201, Sizes A through F. 2.11 TRAP -SEAL PRIMER VALVES A. Supply -Type, Trap -Seal Primer Valves <Insert drawing designation if any >: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. PPP Inc. F. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1018. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-9 i J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION n n A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric -vent drain connection with air -gap fitting, fixed air -gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air -gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. E. Install temperature- actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Install cabinet -type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. F. Install Y- pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure - reducing valve, and pump. G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI -WH 201. H. Install supply -type, trap -seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. I. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. J. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic - laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Intermediate atmospheric -vent backflow preventers. 2. Reduced - pressure- principle backflow preventers. 3. Double -check backflow - prevention assemblies. 4. Water pressure- reducing valves. 5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 6. Supply -type, trap -seal primer valves. 1 �1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 10 1 K. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports: 1. Test each reduced - pressure - principle backflow preventer and double -check backflow- prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Set field- adjustable pressure set points of water pressure- reducing valves. B. Set field- adjustable flow of balancing valves. C. Set field - adjustable temperature set points of temperature - actuated water mixing valves. END OF SECTION 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-11 SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE /SEI 7. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Field quality- control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF /ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF -dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF- sewer" for plastic sewer piping. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-1 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUB -AND- SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. E 2.3 HUBLESS, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. CISPI, Hubless- Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following. a. ANACO- Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. C. Fernco Inc. d. Matco - Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless -steel corrugated shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. C. Heavy -Duty, Hubless- Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ANACO- Husky. b. Clamp -All Corp. C. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-2 t 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless -steel shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder joint fittings. C. Copper Flanges: ASME B 16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full -face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos -free, 1/8- inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux. 2.5 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 1. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. 1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.7 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: ' 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-3 I pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. C. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. C. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full- length, corrosion - resistant outer shield and corrosion- resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section 'Barth Moving." 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-4 I e systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right ' angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. ' D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. ' F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. ' H. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic - restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." I. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -turn, ' double Y -branch and 1/8 -bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and ' reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. ' J. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past ' each joint as completed. ' K. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. ' L. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." M. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." I SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-5 H_ N. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661. Zn' P P g O. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. P. Install underground and piping according to ASTM D 2321. Q. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." R. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. B. Join hubless, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless- piping coupling joints. C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water - flushable, lead -free flux and ASTM B 32, lead- free -alloy solder. D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. E. Plastic, Nonpressure- Piping, Solvent- Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-6 1 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. ' 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: ' 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. ' 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater valve. 3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic- restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." ' B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon -steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. ' 2. Install carbon -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Install stainless -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. ' 4. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 5. Install individual, straight, horizontal runs: piping a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 6. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 7. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. ' C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. ' E. Rod diameter be for double hangers, 3/8 may reduced one size -rod with -inch minimum rods. ' SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-7 �I F. Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and g minimum rod diameters: _ 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. 5. Spacing for 10 -foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast -iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 2 -1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 4. NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8 -inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4 -inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. J. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: I. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. K. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches. L. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-8 L� G Fi t t 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 5. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor. 6. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 7. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed I SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-9 I� before it was tested. 3. Roughing -in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on .completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent - stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1 -inch wg. Use U -tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. D. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water -based latex paint. 3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: [Unshielded] [Shielded], nonpressure transition couplings. B. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 4. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent - cemented joints. 5. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 6. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-10 �1 END OF SECTION 221316 I SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-11 C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: ' 1. Service class, cast -iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent - cemented joints. 4. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. ' D. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless- piping couplings; coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION 221316 I SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-11 SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties: 1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Floor drains. 4. Roof flashing assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKWATER VALVES A. Horizontal, Cast -Iron Backwater Valves 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.14.1. 3. Size: Same as connected piping. 4. Body: Cast iron. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-1 H C 5. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve. 6. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless. 7. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition. 8. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full -size, cast -iron, soil -pipe extension to field - installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover. Drain- Outlet Backwater Valves : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. C. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet. 3. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain. 4. Check Valve: Removable ball float. 5. Inlet: Threaded. 6. Outlet: Threaded or spigot. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Cast -Iron Cleanouts 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. L 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised -head, cast -iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. Cast -Iron Floor Cleanouts : 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-2 �I fl H__ In � I 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast -Iron Floor Drains I SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-3 a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. ' f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. ' 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for heavy -duty, adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. ' 4. 5. Type: Heavy -duty, adjustable housing. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Not required. 7. Outlet Connection: Threaded. ' 8. Closure: Cast -iron plug. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with [threads] [set- screws or other device]. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Rough bronze. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. ' 12. Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy Duty. 13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Extra -Heavy class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to ' cleanout. C. Cast -Iron Wall Cleanouts . 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ' following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 3. 4. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M. Include wall access. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 5. Body: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 6. Closure: Countersunk or raised -head, cast -iron plug. 7. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 8. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome- plated brass or stainless -steel cover plate with screw. 9. Wall Access: Round, nickel - bronze, copper - alloy, or stainless -steel wall - installation frame and cover. 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast -Iron Floor Drains I SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-3 Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. C. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2.4 A. 2. Standard: ASME A 112.6.3 with backwater valve. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Seepage Flange: Not required. 6. Anchor Flange: Not required. 7. Clamping Device: Not required. 8. Outlet: Bottom. 9. Backwater Valve: Integral, ASME A112.14.1, swing -check type. 10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required. 11. Sediment Bucket: Not required. 12. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze. 13. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 14. Top Shape: Round. 15. Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy -Duty. 16. Funnel: Not required. 17. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap -seal primer valve connection. 18. Trap Material: Cast iron. 19. Trap Pattern: Standard P -trap. 20. Trap Features: Trap -seal primer valve drain connection. ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES Roof Flashing Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor /Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0- lb /sq. ft., 0.0625- inch - thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with galvanized -steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. Open -Top Vent Cap: Without cap. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES �I F] H 221319-4 3 3 2. Low - Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal -proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With field- installed, vandal -proof vent cap. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Open Drains: 1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub - and - spigot, cast -iron, soil -pipe fittings. Include P -trap, hub -and- spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping[ with increaser fitting of size indicated]. B. Deep -Seal Traps: 1. Description: Cast -iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap -seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4- inch - minimum water seal. b. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: 5- inch - minimum water seal. C. Floor- Drain, Trap -Seal Primer Fittings : 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap -seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. D. Air -Gap Fittings: 1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. E. Sleeve Flashing Device: 1. Description: Manufactured, cast -iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized -steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized -steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab. 2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping. F. Stack Flashing Fittings: 1. Description: Counterflashing -type, cast -iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-5 r G. Vent Caps 1. Description: Cast -iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal -proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. 2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Use: 4.0- lb /sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0- lb /sq. ft., 0.0469 -inch thickness. 3. Burning: 6- lb /sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness. B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloy. E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, solvent -type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-6 I I finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4 -inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. C. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than f- inch total depression. 3. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. H. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor. I. Install deep -seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. J. Install floor - drain, trap -seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap -seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap -seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. K. Install air -gap fittings on draining -type backflow preventers and on indirect -waste piping ' discharge into sanitary drainage system. L. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. ' M. Install vent e caps on each vent i passing through roof P PPP g g N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. I SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-7 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0- lb /sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0- lb /sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast -iron sleeve having calking recess. 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic - laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each grease interceptor. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 221319 r] H 0 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-8 SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Storm drainage piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE /SEI 7. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For storm drainage piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. B. Field quality- control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF /ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF- drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF- sewer" for plastic sewer piping. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUB- AND - SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. I L 2.3 HUBLESS, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. CISPI, Hubless- Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ANACO- Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. C. Femco Inc. d. Matco - Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless -steel corrugated shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. C. Heavy -Duty, Hubless- Piping Couplings: I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ANACO- Husky. b. Clamp -All Corp. C. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-2 ��I i� I C 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless -steel shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast - copper fittings or ASME B16.29, wrought - copper, solder joint fittings. C. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full -face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos -free, 1/8- inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux. 2.5 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 1. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. 1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.7 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-3 rij pipes es to be joined. 1 2. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified- piping- system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. C. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. C. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full - length, corrosion - resistant outer shield and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-4 hl� �I V systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic - restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." I. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches bends and g g P P g g aPP P > long -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are, connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. J. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. K. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Storm - Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. L. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI s Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. M. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." N. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661. O. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. P. Install underground and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. ' FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-5 Q. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force -main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." R. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. B. Join hubless, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless- piping coupling joints. C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure. Use ASTM B 813, water - flushable, lead -free flux and ASTM B 32, lead- free -alloy solder. D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. E. Plastic, Nonpressure- Piping, Solvent- Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-6 1 3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." fc1r,20001 / Cep Z. it iJ 1[ I. Ili l�G I A. Comply with requirements for seismic - restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon -steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install carbon -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 4. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting[, valve,] and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. I FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-7 �i 4. Spacing for 10 -foot pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast -iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 2 -1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. J. Install hangers for and piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. K. Install supports for vertical and piping every 48 inches. L. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 2. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. f I 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-8 C r 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping[, except outside leaders,] on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless - piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. I FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-9 4. Solid -wall ABS e i ABS socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. PPS g J 5. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 6. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. B. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 4. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe- Material Couplings: Unshielded Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION 221413 k FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-10 SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof drains. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Backwater valves. 4. Trench drains. 5. Flashing materials. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS A. Cast -Iron, Large -Sump, General - Purpose Roof Drains: 1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general- purpose roof drains. 2. Body Material: Cast iron. 3. Outlet: Bottom. 4. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 5. Dome Material: Cast iron. B. Cast -Iron, Medium -Sump, General - Purpose Roof Drains: 1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general - purpose roof drains. 2. Body Material: Cast iron. 3. Outlet: Bottom. 4. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 5. Dome Material: Cast iron. C. Cast -Iron, Small -Sump, General - Purpose Roof Drains: STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-1 k 1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general- purpose roof drains. 2. Body Material: Cast iron. 3. Outlet: Bottom. 4. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 5. Dome Material: Cast iron. 00 CLEANOUTS A. Floor Cleanouts : 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M, for heavy -duty, adjustable housing cleanouts. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Heavy -duty, adjustable housing. 4. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron. 5. Clamping Device: Required. 6. Outlet Connection: Threaded. 7. Closure: Cast -iron plug. 8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel - bronze, copper alloy. 10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 11. Top- Loading Classification: Extra -Heavy Duty. 12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Extra -Heavy class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. B. Test Tees : 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout test tees. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hub -and- spigot, cast -iron soil -pipe T -branch or hubless, cast -iron soil - pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure Plug: Countersunk, brass. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. C. Wall Cleanouts : 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hubless, cast -iron soil -pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk or raised -head, cast -iron plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome- plated brass or stainless -steel cover plate with screw. 7. Wall Access: Round, nickel - bronze, copper - alloy, or stainless -steel wall - installation frame and cover. 2.3 BACKWATER VALVES A. Cast -Iron, Horizontal Backwater Valves: HI STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-2 J 1. Standard: ASME A112.14.1, for backwater valves. ' 2. Size: Same as connected piping. 3. Body Material: Cast iron. 4. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve. 5. End Connections: hubless. 6. Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition. 7. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full -size, cast -iron soil -pipe extension to field- , installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover. ' 2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 1528 152M, 12 oz. /sq. ft.. B. Zinc- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04 - inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill - phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. ' C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 -mil minimum thickness. ' D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloy. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07 Sections. 1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and ' adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets. 3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. ' B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. ' 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. ' STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-3 C. For floor cleanouts for P g i P in below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. E. Install horizontal backwater valves in floor with cover flush with floor. F. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor. G. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated. H. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished surface unless otherwise indicated. I. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof membrane. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0- lb /sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0- lb /sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner. 2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. k I STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-4 i 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-5 SECTION 221429 - SUMP PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submersible sump pumps. 2. Sump -pump basins and basin covers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor - operated water pumps. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS A. Submersible, Fixed - Position, Single -Seal Sump Pumps: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. b. Grundfos Pumps Corp. C. Little Giant Pump Co. d. Stancor, Inc. e. Weil Pump Company, Inc. f. Zoeller Company. 2. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested sump -pump unit. SUMP PUMPS 221429-1 0 3. Pump Type: Submersible, end - suction, single- stage, close - coupled, overhung - impeller, centrifugal sump pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3. 4. Pump Casing: Cast iron, with strainer inlet, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge for piping connection. 5. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A cast iron, semiopen design for clear wastewater handling, and keyed and secured to shaft. 6. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel or steel, with factory- sealed, grease- lubricated ball bearings. 7. Seal: Mechanical. 8. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor -start type; with built -in overload protection; lifting eye or lug; and three- conductor, waterproof power cable of length required and with grounding plug and cable - sealing assembly for connection at pump. a. Motor Housing Fluid: Oil. Controls: a. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Switch Type: Pedestal- mounted float switch with float rods and rod buttons. C. Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps if one cannot handle load. d. Float Guides: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater than 60 inches. e. High -Water Alarm: Cover - mounted, compression -probe alarm, with electric bell; 120 -V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell. 10. Controls: a. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1; wall - mounted. b. Switch Type: Mechanical -float type, in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures with mounting rod and electric cables. C. Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps if one cannot handle load. d. High -Water Alarm: Rod - mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mechanical -float, mercury-float, or pressure switch matching control and electric bell; 120 -V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell. 2.2 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. B. Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed. 0 H H 0 H_ in SUMP PUMPS 221429-2 1 J J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavation and filling are specified in Division 31 Section 'Barth Moving." 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pump Installation Standard: Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of sump pumps. END OF SECTION 221429 ' SUMP PUMPS 221429-3 SECTION 221513 - GENERAL - SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping and related specialties for general - service compressed -air systems operating at 150 psig or less. B. See Division 22 Section "General- Service Packaged Air Compressors and Receivers" for general - service air compressors and accessories. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Compressed -air piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of seismic events determined according to SEI /ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Pressure regulators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 2. Automatic drain valves. 3. Filters. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 4. Lubricators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality - control test reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," for low- pressure compressed -air piping. GENERAL - SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR 221513-1 PIPING PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B, black with ends threaded according to ASME B 1.20.1. 1. Steel Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, galvanized seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 2. Malleable -Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 or 300, threaded. 3. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150 or 300, threaded. 4. Steel Flanges: ASME B 16.5, Class 150 or 300, carbon steel, threaded. 5. Wrought -Steel Butt- Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, Schedule 40. 6. Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150 or 300, carbon steel. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L seamless, drawn- temper, water tube. 1. Wrought- Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder joint pressure type or MSS SP -73, wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints. 2. Cast - Copper -Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150 or 300. 3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP -123. C. Transition Couplings for Metal Piping: Metal coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed -air piping system contents. 1. ASME B 16.2 1, nonmetallic, flat, full -face, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer complying with ASTM F 656. 2.3 VALVES A. Metal Ball, Butterfly, Check, Gate, and Globe Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." n GENERAL - SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR 221513-2 PIPING J 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS ' A. General Requirements for Dielectric Fittings: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with insulating material; suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. Include threaded, solder joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. ' B. Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. ' 2.5 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Bronze -Hose Flexible Pipe Connectors: Corrugated - bronze tubing with bronze wire -braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. ' 1. Working - Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum. 2. End Connections, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain -end copper tube. 3. End Connections, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy. B. Stainless -Steel -Hose Flexible Pipe Connectors: Corrugated - stainless -steel tubing with stainless - steel wire -braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. ' 1. Working - Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum. 2. End Connections, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel pipe nipple. 3. End Connections, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple. ' 2.6 SPECIALTIES A. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of bronze body with poppet -type safety valve for compressed -air service. ' 1. Pressure Settings: Higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver pressure rating. B. Air -Main Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, pilot - operated direct acting, spring- loaded manual pressure- setting adjustment, and rated for 250 -psig inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated. ' C. Air -Line Pressure Regulators: Diaphragm or pilot operated, bronze body, direct acting, spring - loaded manual pressure- setting adjustment, and rated for 200 -psig minimum inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated. ' D. Automatic Drain Valves: Stainless -steel body and internal parts, rated for 200 -psig minimum working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated. ' E. Coalescing Filters: Coalescing type with activated carbon capable of removing water and oil aerosols; with color - change dye to indicate when carbon is saturated and warning light to ' indicate when selected maximum pressure drop has been exceeded. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated. GENERAL - SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR 221513-3 PIPING l F. Mechanical Filters: Two - stage, mechanical- separation -type, air -line filters. Equip with deflector plates, resin - impregnated- ribbon -type filters with edge filtration, and drain cock. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated. 2.7 QUICK COUPLINGS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Aeroquip Corporation; Eaton Corp. 2. Bowes Manufacturing Inc. 3. Foster Manufacturing, Inc. 4. Milton Industries, Inc. 5. Parker Hannifm Corp.; Fluid Connectors Group; Quick Coupling Div. 6. Rectus Corp. 7. Schrader - Bridgeport; Amflo Div. 8. Schrader- Bridgeport/Standard Thomson. 9. Snap -Tite, Inc.; Quick Disconnect & Valve Division. 10. TOMCO Products Inc. 11. Tuthill Corporation; Hansen Coupling Div. B. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking- mechanism feature for quick connection and disconnection of compressed -air hose. C. Automatic - Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight - through brass body with O -ring or gasket seal and stainless -steel or nickel - plated -steel operating parts. 1. Socket End: With one -way valve and threaded inlet for connection to piping or threaded hose fitting. 2. Plug End: Flow- sensor - bleeder, check -valve type with barbed outlet for attaching hose. D. Valveless Quick Couplings: Straight - through brass body with stainless -steel or nickel- plated- steel operating parts. 1. Socket End: With O -ring or gasket seal, without valve, and with barbed inlet for attaching hose. 2. Plug End: With barbed outlet for attaching hose. 2.8 HOSE ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Compatible hose, clamps, couplings, and splicers suitable for compressed -air service, of nominal diameter indicated, and rated for [300 -psig] <Insert pressure> minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hose: Reinforced single- or double - wire - braid, CR- covered hose for compressed -air service. 2. Hose Clamps: Stainless -steel clamps or bands. 3. Hose Couplings: Two- piece, straight - through, threaded brass or stainless -steel O -ring or gasket -seal swivel coupling with barbed ends for connecting two sections of hose. L �I �I k r] GENERAL- SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR 221513-4 PIPING J 4. Hose Splicers: One - piece, straight - through brass or stainless -steel fitting with barbed ends for connecting two sections of hose. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Low - Pressure Compressed -Air Distribution Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe; threaded, malleable -iron fittings; and threaded joints. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Type K or L, copper tube; wrought- copper fittings; and brazedjoints. B. Drain Piping: Use one of the following piping materials: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Type M copper tube; wrought - copper fittings; and brazed or soldered joints. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: PVC pipe and fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Comply with requirements in "Valve Applications" Article in Division 22 Section "General- Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Equipment Isolation Valves: Safety - exhaust, copper -alloy ball valve with exhaust vent and pressure rating at least as great as piping system operating pressure. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of compressed -air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, air - compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations . to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. . Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and to coordinate with other services occupying that space. E. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. F. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow. G. Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings GENERAL- SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR 221513-5 ' PIPING C� same as or higher than system pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated. H. Equipment and Specialty Flanged Connections: 1. Use steel companion flange with gasket for connection to steel pipe. 2. Use cast - copper -alloy companion flange with gasket and brazed or soldered joint for connection to copper tube. Do not use soldered joints for connection to air compressors or to equipment or machines producing shock or vibration. I. Install branch connections to compressed -air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points. J. Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on each receiver. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." K. Install piping to permit valve servicing. L. Install piping free of sags and bends. M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. N. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic - restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." O. Install unions, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment and machine. P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. fl D D fl GENERAL- SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR 221513-6 PIPING E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Join according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Flanged Joints: Use asbestos -free, nonmetallic gasket suitable for compressed air. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure. G. Solvent- Cemented Joints for PVC Piping: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer and join according to ASME B31.9 for solvent- cemented joints and to ASTM D 2672. ' H. Dissimilar Metal Piping Material Joints: Use dielectric fittings. . P g g 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Install shutoff valves and unions or flanged joints at compressed -air piping to air compressors. C. Install shutoff valve at inlet to each automatic drain valve, filter, lubricator, and pressure regulator. D. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed -air flow to and from compressed -air piping specialties and equipment. 3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric unions in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 3.7 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION A. Install flexible pipe connectors in discharge piping of each air compressor. B. Install bronze -hose flexible pipe connectors in copper compressed -air tubing. C. Install stainless - steel -hose flexible pipe connectors in steel compressed -air piping. 3.8 SPECIALTY INSTALLATION A. Install safety valves on receivers in quantity and size to relieve at least the capacity of connected air compressors. ' B. Install air -main pressure regulators in compressed -air piping at or near air compressors. C. Install air -line pressure regulators in branch piping to equipment. D. Install automatic drain valves on aftercoolers, receivers, and dryers. Discharge condensate onto nearest floor drain. GENERAL - SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR 221513-7 PIPING E. Install coalescing filters in compressed -air piping at or near air compressors and upstream from mechanical filters. Mount on wall at locations indicated. F. Install mechanical filters in compressed -air piping at or near air compressors and downstream from coalescing filters. Mount on wall at locations indicated. G. Install quick couplings at piping terminals for hose connections. H. Install hose assemblies at hose connections. 3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic- restraint devices. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: 1. 100 Feet or Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 2. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. H. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. I. Install hangers for Schedule 40, steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1/4 to NPS 1/2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1 -1/4: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 1 -1/2: 12 feet with 3/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 2: 13 feet with 3/8 -inch rod. J. Install supports for vertical, Schedule 40, steel piping every 15 feet. K. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. GENERAL- SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR PIPING 221513-8 5. NPS 1 -1/4: 108 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 6. NPS 1 -1/2: 10 feet with 3/8 -inch rod. 7. NPS 2: 11 feet with 3/8 -inch rod. L. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. 3.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Install identifying labels and devices for general- service compressed -air piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Piping Leak Tests: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill general- service compressed -air piping with oil -free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure. 2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Inspect filters, lubricators and pressure regulators for proper operation. END OF SECTION 221513 GENERAL - SERVICE COMPRESSED -AIR 221513-9 PIPING SECTION 230010 —HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to specification section 220010 "Plumbing General Provisions" for this section. END OF SECTION 230010 HVAC GENERAL 230010-1 PROVISIONS SECTION 230080 —HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to specification section 220080 "Plumbing Insulation" for this section. END OF SECTION 230080 HVAC INSULATION 230080-1 SECTION 230080 —HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to specification section 220080 "Plumbing Insulation" for this section. END OF SECTION 230080 HVAC INSULATION 230080-1 U SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 5. Housed spring mounts. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Spring hangers. 8. Spring hangers with vertical -limit stops. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Restraining braces and cables. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind - Restraint Loading: 1. Basic Wind Speed: Per Structural Documetns. 2. Building Classification Category: Per Strucutral Documents. 3. Minimum 10 lb /sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal. B. Seismic - Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: Per Structural Documetns. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: Per Structural Documetns. a. Component Importance Factor: Per Structural Documetns. b. Component Response Modification Factor: Per Structural Documetns. C. Component Amplification Factor: Per Structural Documetns. 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): Per Structural Documetns. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1- Second Period: Per Structural Documetns. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-1 p 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Delegated - Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic - restraint calculations and details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality- control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic - restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Seismic - restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC -ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic - restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic - restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 230548-2 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C 8. Vibration Isolation. ' 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Pads : Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that ' match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water - resistant rubber. C. Mounts : Double - deflection type, with molded, oil- resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory- drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color -code or otherwise ' identify to indicate capacity range. 1. Materials: Cast - ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and ' opposing, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock - absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge- ' bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. D. Restrained Mounts: All - directional mountings with seismic restraint. ' 1. Materials: Cast- ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. ' 2. Neoprene: Shock - absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge - bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. E. Spring Isolators : Freestanding, laterally stable, open - spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. ' 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without ' deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4 -inch- thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. ' 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. F. Restrained Spring Isolators : Freestanding, steel, open -spring isolators with seismic or limit- ' stop restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to ' weight being removed; factory- drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4- inch - thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the ' VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 230548-3 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. G. Housed Spring Mounts : Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile -iron or steel housing to provide all- directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4 -inch travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar. H. Elastomeric Hangers : Single or double - deflection type, fitted with molded, oil- resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. Spring Hangers : Combination coil -spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel- washer- reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self- centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. Spring Hangers with Vertical -Limit Stop : Combination coil - spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical -limit stop. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up- stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self- centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT �I H r�� i 0 D u fl n� u K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support <Insert drawing designation >:. All - directional, acoustical pipe ' anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2- inch - thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions. L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. 2.2 SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICES ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 7. Mason Industries. 8. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 9. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. ' B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of ' components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. C. Channel Support System: MFMA -3, shop- or field- fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion - resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized -steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and ' with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted- support- system sleeve with internally bolted ' connections to hanger rod. F. Bushings for Floor- Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs. ' G. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One - piece, molded, oil- and water - resistant ' VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 230548-5 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT k neoprene, with a flat washer face. H. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled -in and stud -wedge or female -wedge type in zinc - coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic - Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.2 VIBRATION- CONTROL AND SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. B. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 2. Install seismic - restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. C. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP -127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. E. Install seismic - restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor - mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 230548-6 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. H. Drilled -in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy -duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc- coated steel anchors for interior and stainless -steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load- spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-7 D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR 230548-8 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant - volume air systems. b. Variable- air - volume systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant -flow hydronic systems. b. Variable -flow hydronic systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. LEED Submittals: 1. Air - Balance Report for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation of work performed for ASHRAE 62. 1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." 2. TAB Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation of work performed for ASHRAE/IESNA 90. 1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step -by -step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. B. Certified TAB reports. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593- 1 FOR HVAC 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB orTABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC,NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC,NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Commissioning Authority. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62. 1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-2 FOR HVAC i "Metal Ducts " and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire- stopped if required. F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. ' 2. Calculate system- effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in ' AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality- control testing, ' cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. ' I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. J. Examine terminal units, such as variable- air - volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. I K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. ' L. Examine three -way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. M. Examine heat - transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. ' N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. ' O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures. ' B. Complete system- readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical -power wiring is complete. ' 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature - control systems are operational. ' TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-3 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air - pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING 3.3 A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62. 1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper - control positions, valve position indicators, fan- speed - control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" duct layouts. C. For variable- air - volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct - airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. L 1 1 HI 0 0 u H D H TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 -4 FOR HVAC U I. Check for airflow blockages. ' J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air - handling -unit components. t L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT - VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-5 FOR HVAC A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by ' fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. ! a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total ' airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and ' upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as ' possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. ' d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air - handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air- handling and - treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat- recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system -effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Obtain approval from Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air - ' handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air - handling -unit performance. 7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full - cooling, full - heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required ' brake horsepower. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-5 FOR HVAC B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated J airflows within specified tolerances. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct- reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -AIR- VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set -point airflow with the remainder at maximum airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced - airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure- Independent, Variable- Air - Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable- air - volume systems as follows: 1. Set outdoor -air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust -air dampers at a position that simulates full - cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply -fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal -unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal -unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal -unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-6 FOR HVAC from terminal units the same as described for constant - volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant - volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return -air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant - volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static - pressure controller at the main supply -air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record final fan- performance data. C. Pressure- Dependent, Variable- Air - Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable- air - volume systems as follows: 1. Balance variable- air - volume systems the same as described for constant - volume air systems. 2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full- airflow condition. 3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the static - pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant - volume air systems. 4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. 5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is installed, and verify operation of the static - pressure controller. 6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller. 7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant - volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant - volume air systems. D. Pressure- Dependent, Variable- Air - Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable- air - volume systems as follows: 1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced - airflow terminal units so they are ' TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-7 e distributed evenly among the branch ducts. 2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable- airflow controller set at maximum airflow. 3. Set terminal units at full- airflow condition. 4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply -fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant - volume air systems. 5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. 6. Measure static pressure at the sensor. 7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant - volume air systems. 3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch - circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water - station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow - control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential- pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive - displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow - balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive - displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Commissioning Authorityand comply with requirements in Division 23 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-8 FOR HVAC 0 Section " Hydronic Pumps." 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head - capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions. ' 3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design. ' B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed. C. Measure flow at all pressure- independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed. D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. ' E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow - pressure -drop relationship may be used as a flow - indicating device. F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over ' indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. ' H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature. ' I. Measure the differential - pressure - control -valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing. J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three -way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat - exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-9 J systems. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal- protection - element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable- Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fans. B. Measure entering- and leaving -air temperatures. C. Record compressor data. 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving -water temperatures and water flow. 3.13 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT - TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-10 FOR HVAC 1 3. Airflow. ' 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. 3.14 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: ' 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. ' 3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. ' 3.15 REPORTING A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as ' specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and ' balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.16 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Pump curves. Fan curves. Manufacturers' test data. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: ' 1. Title page. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593- 11 FOR HVAC J 7 a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor -, return-, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter f. Inlet vane settings for variable- air - volume systems. g. Settings for supply -air, static - pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. 3.17 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions. 0 7 kl L TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593- 12 FOR 14VAC 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor -, return-, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter f. Inlet vane settings for variable- air - volume systems. g. Settings for supply -air, static - pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. 3.17 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions. 0 7 kl L TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593- 12 FOR 14VAC END OF SECTION 230593 H i 7 ' TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 13 SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC &R systems, assemblies, and equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. B. CxA: Commissioning Authority. C. HVAC &R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration. D. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as- built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of readiness. B. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities. 1.4 ALLOWANCES A. Labor, instrumentation, tools, and equipment costs for technicians for the performance of commissioning testing are covered by the "Schedule of Allowances" Article in Division 01 Section "Allowances." 1.5 UNIT PRICES A. Commissioning testing allowance may be adjusted up or down by the "List of Unit Prices" Article in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" when actual man-hours are computed at the end of commissioning testing. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800-1 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA. B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting. C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting. D. Participate in HVAC &R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA. E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation. F. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period. 1.7 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Project - specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual HVAC &R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract. B. Direct commissioning testing. C. Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete. D. Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual. 1.8 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION A. Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan: 1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and reports. 2. Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including design changes that occurred during the construction phase. 3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for HVAC &R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested. 4. Certificate of readiness, signed by the Contractor, certifying that HVAC &R systems, assemblies, equipment, components, and associated controls are ready for testing. 5. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup procedures have been completed. 6. Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC &R systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing. 7. Test and inspection reports and certificates. 8. Corrective action documents. 9. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. C' D - 11, d 1J n u COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800-2 1 7 i C PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING PREPARATION A. Certify that HVAC &R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents. B. Certify that HVAC &R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and ' calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded. ' C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved. ' D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. ' F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life -safety systems during each mode of operation. ' G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA. 3.2 TESTING AND BALANCING VERIFICATION A. Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, ' checklists, and certificates to the CxA. B. Notify the CxA at least 10 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work. ' C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC &R systems at the direction of the CxA. 1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing Contractor days in advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified. ' 2. The testing and balancing Contractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected. 3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, ' adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered. 4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be ' COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800-3 performed. 3.3 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA. B. Scope of HVAC &R testing shall include entire HVAC &R installation, from central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions. C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors. D. The CxA along with the HVAC &R Subcontractor, testing and balancing Subcontractor, and HVAC &R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC &R systems, subsystems, and equipment. E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible. F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions. G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical. H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical. I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC &R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests. 3.4 hvac &R systems, subsystems, and equipment Testing Procedures A. Boiler Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 23 boiler Sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and boiler certification to the CxA. B. HVAC &R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls." Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans. 7 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800-4 C. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are specified in Division 23 piping Sections. HVAC &R Subcontractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following: ' 1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of ' piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan. 2. Description of equipment for flushing operations. 3. Minimum flushing water velocity. 4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned, flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated. D. Refrigeration System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of chillers, cooling towers, refrigerant compressors and condensers, heat pumps, and other refrigeration systems. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and ' testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested. ' E. HVAC &R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including HVAC &R terminal equipment and unitary equipment. t F. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls. I END OF SECTION 230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800-5 SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Operating - Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. B. Natural -Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less . C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural -gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. ' 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural -gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building ' structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Delegated - Design Submittal: For natural -gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the ' qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. ' 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. ' FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-1 B. Field quality- control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought -Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory- applied, three -layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat - shrink PE sleeves. B. Annealed- Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type L. 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern. 2. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B 16.26 and SAE J513. a. Copper fittings with long nuts. b. Metal -to -metal compression seal without gasket. C. Dryseal threads complying with ASME B1.20.3. 3. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory- applied, extruded PE a minimum of 0.022 inch thick. FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-2 �j 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed - Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable - Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless -steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating - Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc - coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B 1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches. B. Quick - Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. ' 1. Copper -alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. ' 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. C. Y- Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable -iron increaser fitting with corrosion- resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross - sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded -end connection. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D 10.12/D 10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS ' A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. ' 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule " and Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. ' B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-3 �I r-_ C. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME 131.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME 131.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1 -1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. One - Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 0 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome- plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable -stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. Two - Piece, Full -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome- plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING ( J J 231123-4 t F1 6. Packing: Threaded -body packnut design with adjustable -stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. E. Two- Piece, Regular -Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome- plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 6. Packing: Threaded -body packnut design with adjustable -stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. F. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP -78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. I FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-5 �l G. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast -iron, two- section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast -iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee - handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve. 2.5 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES A. Electrically Operated Valves: Comply with UL 429. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson. b. Dungs, Karl, Inc. C. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Goyen Valve Corp.; Tyco Environmental Systems. e. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. f. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div. g. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Pilot operated. 3. Body: Brass or aluminum. 4. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel. 6. 120 -V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous -duty molded coil, and replaceable. 7. NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, coil enclosure. 8. Normally closed. 9. Visual position indicator. 2.6 EARTHQUAKE VALVES A. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Vanguard Valves, Inc. 2. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maximum Operating Pressure: 5 psig. 4. Cast - aluminum body with nickel - plated chrome steel internal parts. 5. Nitrile- rubber valve washer. k' fl FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-6 6. Sight windows for visual indication of valve position. ' 7. Threaded end connections complying with ASME B 1.20.1. 8. Wall mounting bracket with bubble level indicator. B. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ' the following: a. Pacific Seismic Products, Inc. ' 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig. Cast - aluminum body with stainless -steel internal parts. Nitrile- rubber, reset -stem o -ring seal. Valve position, open or closed, indicator. Composition valve seat with clapper held by spring or magnet locking mechanism. Level indicator. End Connections: Threaded for valves NPS 2 and smaller. ' 2.7 PRESSURE REGULATORS 1 FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-7 A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion - resistant components. ' 3. 4. Elevation compensator. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller. B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ' the following: a. Actaris. ' b. American Meter Company. C. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. ' f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die -cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc- plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc- plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 1 FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-7 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet- stabilized mineral - filled nylon. g � Y 8. Single -port, self - contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field - installed, stainless -steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig. C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. C. Harper Wyman Co.. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die -cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc- plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc- plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet - stabilized, mineral- filled nylon. 7. Factory- Applied Finish: Minimum three -layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure. 1 psig. 2.8 DIELECTRIC UNIONS A. Dielectric Unions: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco - Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-8 a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. C. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali- resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural -gas piping. B. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe. C. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. E. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.2 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural -gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, t expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. I FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-9 J k' D Install p i p g in in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Locate valves for easy access. H. Install natural -gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas -fired appliances and equipment for roughing -in requirements. M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service -meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. S. Do not use natural -gas piping as grounding electrode. T. Install strainer on inlet of each line- pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123- 10 V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless -steel tubing or copper connector. B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. C. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing. 3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. I C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B 1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS 1310.12/1310.12M, using qualified processes and ' welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory- applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds ' and where damage to coating occurs during construction. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. F. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not ' FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-11 overti g hten. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic - restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural -gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas -fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. 3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification. B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Natural -gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123-12 �11 C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.9 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Annealed- temper copper tube with wrought - copper fittings and brazed flared joints. 2. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. 3.10 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. One - piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two - piece, regular -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. One - piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two - piece, regular -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. One - piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two - piece, regular -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION 231123 FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 231123- 13 supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of PP P P P � the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality- control test reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. B. Annealed- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K. C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. D. Wrought- Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. C. Victaulic Company. 2. Grooved -End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting. 3. Grooved - End -Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile -iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves,[ prelubricated] EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. E. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME B 16.22. HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -2 � I 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. C. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. D. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. E. Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. F. Wrought Cast- and Forged -Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. G. Grooved Mechanical -Joint Fittings and Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. ' Central Sprinkler Company; a division of Tyco Fire & Building Products. C. National Fittings, Inc. d. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. e. Victaulic Company. 2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65 -45 -12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved -end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable -iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure- responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. I HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-3 a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face Class 125 cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges. yP b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg -1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco - Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. C. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.5 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." B. Automatic Temperature - Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-4 C. Bronze, Calibrated- Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. C. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. g. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company. 2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. D. Cast -Iron or Steel, Calibrated- Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. C. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. 2. Body: Cast -iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon- filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. E. Diaphragm- Operated, Pressure- Reducing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. I HYDRONIC PIPING Amtrol, Inc. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 232113-5 fl C. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon - filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O- rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Low inlet- pressure check valve. 8. Inlet Strainer: <Insert materials>, removable without system shutdown. 9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, 6. with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. F. Diaphragm - Operated Safety Valves: Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Inlet Strainer: <Insert materials >, removable without system shutdown. following: Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. G. Automatic Flow - Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass -alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-6 r� a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. C. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. 4. Disc: Glass and carbon - filled PTFE. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O- rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 8. Inlet Strainer: <Insert materials >, removable without system shutdown. 9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. G. Automatic Flow - Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass -alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-6 r� 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F. 2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-7 1. 2. Amtrol, Inc. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 4. Taco. ' B. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. ' 4. 5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 prig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. ' C. Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125 -psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 2. Air - Control Tank Fitting: Cast -iron body, copper - plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless -steel ball check, 100 -gal. unit only; sized for compression -tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125 -psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. 3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125 -psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, ' 4. drain water, and close off system. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4 -inch- diameter gage glass, and slotted -metal glass guard. D. In -Line Air Separators: 1. Tank: One -piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F. I HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-7 i 2.7 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y -Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. B. Stainless -Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire - reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4 -inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. C. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 23 Section 'Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L , drawn- temper copper tubing, wrought - copper fittings, and soldered brazed pressure -seal joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 125, cast -iron fittings; cast -iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints. B. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L, drawn- temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought -steel fittings and wrought -cast or forged -steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. 3. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints. C. Hot -Water Heating Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed- temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and brazed joints. Use the fewest possible joints. D. Condensate -Drain Piping: Type M, drawn- temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and soldered joints or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent - welded joints. E. Condensate -Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent - welded joints. HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -8 I F. Blowdown -Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the ' service in which blowdown drain is installed. G. Air -Vent Piping: ' 1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal -to- plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Outlet: Type K, annealed- temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints. H. Safety-Valve -Inlet and - Outlet Piping for Hot -Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal -to- plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's ' written instructions. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff -duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection ' to each piece of equipment. B. Install calibrated - orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated- orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot -water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip -pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to ' the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure - reducing valves at makeup -water connection to regulate system fill pressure. ' 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. I HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-9 F'111 F. Install i in at indicated slopes. PP g es. P G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure- reducing valve, solenoid valve, in- .line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 23 Section 'Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping." U. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." Comply with W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-10 E 1 requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." ' 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ' A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." ' C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. E. Install hangers for drawn- temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS l: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 1 5. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. F. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points. I G. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10 -foot intervals between floors. HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-11 �I li D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. E. Install hangers for drawn- temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS l: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 1 5. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. F. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points. I G. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10 -foot intervals between floors. HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-11 �I li J 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper - phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. r 0 E J d E H. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved -end fittings and rigid, grooved- end -pipe couplings. I. Mechanically Formed, Copper- Tube - Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer - recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat - transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. C. Install in -line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. 9 [ I D. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full -size, full -port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-12 4 include a full -size, full -port, ball valve. ' E. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. t 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building ' components and structural members. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. ' B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: ' 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the ' system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to 1 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-13 END OF SECTION 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-14 rlir w at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 specified minimum percent of s pressure p p yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure - reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-14 rlir w SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Close - coupled, in -line centrifugal pumps. 2. Separately coupled, horizontally mounted, in -line centrifugal pumps. 3. Separately coupled, vertically mounted, in -line centrifugal pumps. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pump. B. Shop Drawings: For each pump. 1. Show pump layout and connections. 2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CLOSE- COUPLED, IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group. 3. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 4. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 5. TACO Incorporated. B. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, centrifugal, overhung - impeller, close - coupled, in- line pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. C. Pump Construction: HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-1 ai 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, Y P replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion -flange connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant -speed pumps, trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper -alloy shaft sleeve. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless -steel spring, and EPT bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite - impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland. 6. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. D. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof . b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. C. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. d. Efficiency: Premium efficient. 2.2 SEPARATELY COUPLED, HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 4. TACO Incorporated. B. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, centrifugal, overhung- impeller, separately coupled, in -line pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally. C. Pump Construction: Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion -flange connections. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft. For pumps not frequency -drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance. HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-2 p' 3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper -alloy shaft sleeve. ' 4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless -steel spring, and EPT bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. D. Shaft Coupling: Molded - rubber insert with interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration. ' E. Motor: Single speed and resiliently mounted to pump casing. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in ' NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements t for HVAC Equipment." a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. . b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. C. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. d. Efficiency: Premium efficient. ' 2.3 SEPARATELY COUPLED, VERTICALLY MOUNTED, IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: B. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: ' 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 3. TACO Incorporated. ' C. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, centrifugal, overhung- impeller, separately coupled, in -line pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted vertically. D. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion -flange connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency -drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper -alloy shaft sleeve. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a ' stainless -steel spring, and EPT bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-3 b 5. Seal: Packin g seal consistin g g of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite - impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland. 6. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. E. Shaft Coupling: Axially split spacer coupling. F. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing with lifting eyebolt and supporting lugs in motor enclosure. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. . b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. C. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. d. Efficiency: Premium efficient. 2.4 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS A. Suction Diffuser: 1. Angle pattern. 2. 175 -psig pressure rating, cast -iron body and end cap, pump -inlet fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless -steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless -steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory- fabricated support. B. Triple -Duty Valve: 1. Angle or straight pattern. 2. 175 -psig pressure rating, cast -iron body, pump - discharge fitting. 3. Drain plug and bronze -fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. 4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4. B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-4 C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. D. Equipment Mounting: Install in -line pumps with continuous - thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of size required to support weight of in -line pumps. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic - restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 ALIGNMENT A. Perform alignment service. B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame. C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions. D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance. B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. D. Install check, shutoff, and throttling valves check valve and throttling valve with memory stop on discharge side of pumps. E. Install Y -type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base - mounted pumps between pump casing and valves. G. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure -gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple -input selector valve. H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-5 H END OF SECTION 232123 I I 0 C� HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-6 Fl, SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air - conditioning applications. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop based on manufacturer's test data. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality- control test reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." 1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed. REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-1 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR. B. Wrought- Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22. C. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME B 16.22. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95 -5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. F. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Tin - bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned- bronze- wire - reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4 -inch misalignment in minimum 7 -inch- long assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight - through or angle pattern. 2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless -steel spring. 3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 4. Seat: Nylon. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. B. Packed -Angle Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure. 3. Operator: Rising stem. 4. Seat: Nonrotating, self - aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. Seal Cap: Forged -brass or valox hex cap. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. . Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. C. Check Valves: REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-2 1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. 5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated -steel stem, and graphite seal. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. D. Service Valves: 1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 2. Core: Removable ball -type check valve with stainless -steel spring. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2 -inch conduit adapter, and 24 -V ac coil. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. 8. Manual operator. F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O -ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non - asbestos. 4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F. 6. Superheat: Adjustable Nonadjustable. 7. Reverse -flow option (for heat -pump applications). 8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig. REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-3 D H. I J K. Straight -Type Strainers: 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion- resistant coating. 2. Screen: 100 -mesh stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Socket or flare. 4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Angle -Type Strainers: 1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: 100 -mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Replaceable -Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted -steel shell with ductile -iron cover, stainless -steel screws, and neoprene gaskets. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless -steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal. 4. End Connections: Socket. 5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. L. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted -steel shell. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless -steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated [alumina] [charcoal]. 4. End Connections: Socket. 5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. REFRIGERANT PIPING H_ kl H. 232300-4 n � I 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. M. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495. 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion- resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. 2.3 REFRIGERANTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Atofma Chemicals, Inc. 2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. 3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants. 4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Suction Lines NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air - Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- temper tubing and wrought- copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints. B. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- temper tubing and wrought- copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints. C. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type L, drawn - temper tubing and wrought - copper fittings with soldered joints. D. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller: Copper, Type L, drawn - temper tubing and wrought- copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints. E. Safety- Relief -Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, drawn - temper tubing and wrought - copper fittings with soldered joints. 3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A. Install packed -angle valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor. B. Install service valves for gage taps at strainers if they are not an integral part of strainers. C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection. ' REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-5 D. Except as otherwise indicated, install packed-angle valves on inlet and outlet side of filter P dryers. E. Install a full - sized, three - valve bypass around filter dryers. F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top. G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction -line pressure at bulb location. H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety- relief -valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15. I. Install moisture /liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected: 1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Compressor. K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve. L. Install flexible connectors at compressors. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-6 Fri F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation. K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot -gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid -valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion -valve bulb. Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. R. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for ' HVAC Piping." U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with ' REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-7 J requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." B. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 1. Use Type BcuP, copper - phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium -free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. 3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 4. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping and specialties. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-8 3. Test high- and low - pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. C. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. 3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter -dryer core in charging line. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. B. Adjust high- and low - pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. C. Adjust set -point temperature of air - conditioning or chilled -water controllers to the system design temperature. D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor -motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings. E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established. END OF SECTION 232300 I REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-9 SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. 6. Seismic - restraint devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound - control devices, duct - mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE /SEI 7. SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." 1. Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48. 2. Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30. 3. Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15. C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: METAL DUCTS 233113-1 �l 1. Product Data for IE Prerequisite Prere q u 1: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply Q with ASHRAE 62. 1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." 2. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90. 1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." 3. Duct - Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE 62. 1, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-up." 4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop- fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static - pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation. D. Delegated- Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire -rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: METAL DUCTS 233113-2 fl a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. C. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS DI. 1 /D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS 131.2/1311M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static - pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static - pressure class, applicable I METAL DUCTS 233113-3 sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." F ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static - pressure class unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. C. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3 -6, "Conical Tees," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. fl fl �i� r -11 41 METAL DUCTS 233113-4 u I� 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one -side bright fmish for duct surfaces exposed to view. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized -steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface - burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame- spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke - developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two -Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic /silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static - Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 1 METAL DUCTS 233113-5 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static - Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single- component, acid - curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. F. Round Duct Joint O -Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfin/100 sq. ft. at 1 -inch wg and shall be rated for 10 -inch wg static - pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O -ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double - lipped, EPDM O -ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory- fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium- plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all- thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc - chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5 -1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5 -2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium- plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic - locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self - tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. METAL DUCTS 233113-6 r. '1 2. Supports for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless -steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. 2.6 DUCT LINER A. Fibrous -Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124. 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville International, Inc. C. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. d. Owens Coming. 2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent erosion of glass fibers. a. Thickness: 1 inch. b. Thermal Conductivity (k- Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. C. Fire - Hazard Classification: Maximum flame - spread index of 25 and smoke - developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for' adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. 1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50 -1b- tensile, dead -load test perpendicular to duct wall. 2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inchinto airstream. 3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire- hazard classification of duct liner system. 2.7 SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. f METAL DUCTS 233113-7 D B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field- fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion- resistant coating. D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized -steel cables with end connections made of cadmium- plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic - locking and clamping device or double -cable clips. E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted- support- system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled -in and stud -wedge or female -wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air - handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop - fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. D fi 1 �a J H_ H METAL DUCTS 233113-8 0 I I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non - fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. ' K. Where ducts pass through fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. ' L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two -part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. I D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static - pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible ": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply -Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2 -Inch wg: Seal I METAL DUCTS 233113-9 �I 3.4 X11 Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder - actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder - actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder - actuated concrete fasteners for standard- weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder - actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight - aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder - actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5 -1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5 -2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 SEISMIC - RESTRAINT - DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. METAL DUCTS Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than2 -Inch wg: Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION fl D �1 r] 0 L 233113- 10 1 H_ A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.7 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static - pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. METAL DUCTS 233113-11 B. Select seismic - restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators. E. Install seismic - restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to ' structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members. G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy -duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc - coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless -steel anchors for applications exposed to weather. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.7 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static - pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. METAL DUCTS 233113-11 i� C. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air - handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. D. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum - collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous -glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous -glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash -down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA - registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. 3.8 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel. B. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 1 -inch wg. METAL DUCTS 233113-12 0 J E� E. J C' 0 J fl n 1 D. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62. 1, Class 1 and 2) Air: i METAL DUCTS 233113- 13 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. 2. Ducts Connected to Constant - Volume Air - Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 3. Ducts Connected to Variable - Air - Volume Air - Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 3 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. 4. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. C. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. 2. Ducts Connected to Air - Handling Units : a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. D. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62. 1, Class 1 and 2) Air: i METAL DUCTS 233113- 13 METAL DUCTS 233113- 14 Pressure Class: Negative 1 -inch w . a. ss g g b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. 2. Ducts Connected to Air - Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. 3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. E. Outdoor -Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, Terminal Units: 1. Ducts Connected to and a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Air - Handling Units : a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. 3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. F. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Stainless -Steel Ducts: a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Galvanized. METAL DUCTS 233113- 14 1 C. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. C. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius -to- Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90- degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and three segments for 90- degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and four segments for 90 degree elbow. I METAL DUCTS 233113-15 3. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum. G. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - ■ Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. ' b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." C. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. C. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius -to- Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90- degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and three segments for 90- degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and four segments for 90 degree elbow. I METAL DUCTS 233113-15 END OF SECTION 233113 METAL DUCTS 233113- 16 1 3) Velocity 1500 fp m or Higher: 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and five segments for 90- degree elbow. 4) Radius -to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. C. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. H. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, " Figure 4 -6, Branch Connection. a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45- degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3 -6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90- degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. C. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45- degree lateral. END OF SECTION 233113 METAL DUCTS 233113- 16 1 SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Flange connectors. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct - mounted access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Flexible ducts. 9. Duct accessory hardware. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62. 1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." 2. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct insulation R- values comply with tables in ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning." C. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. C. Control damper installations. d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. I AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-1 1.4 Q UALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500 -D testing for damper rating. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed - Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. C. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts. D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1 -side bright finish for exposed ducts. E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-2 k 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS ' A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers I AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-3 r-. i 10. Ruskin Company. 11. SEMCO Incorporated. 12. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Description: Gravity balanced. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. ' D. Maximum System Pressure: 1 -inch wg. E. Frame: 0.052- inch - thick, galvanized sheet steel , with welded corners[ and mounting flange]. ' F. Blades: Multiple single -piece blades, center - pivoted, maximum 6 -inch width, 0.025 -inch- thick, roll - formed aluminum with sealed edges. ' G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked. ' I. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch. J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. L. Bearings: Steel ball. M. Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. ' 2. Counterweights and spring - assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve. a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 -gage minimum. ' b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum. 6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel. 8. Screen Type: Bird. 9. 90- degree stops. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS ' A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers I AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-3 r-. i offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: _ a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. C. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Pottorff, a division of PCI Industries, Inc. h. Ruskin Company. i. Trox USA Inc. j. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating[, with linkage outside airstream]. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Hat - shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 -inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded comers. C. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. C. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized - steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Oil - impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. C. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4 f h. Ruskin Company. i. Trox USA Inc. j. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating[, with linkage outside airstream]. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: Hat - shaped, 0.10 -inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. C. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Roll- Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10 -inch- thick aluminum sheet. e. Extruded- Aluminum Blades: 0.050- inch - thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Oil- impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. C. Jackshaft: 1. Size: 1 -inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe - bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple - damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple - damper assembly. D. Damper Hardware: ' 1. Zinc- plated, die -cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 -inch- thick zinc - plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. ' 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS t A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-5 B. Frames: 1. Hat shaped. 2. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 3. Mitered and welded corners. C. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 2. Opposed -blade design. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick. 5. Blade Edging: Closed -cell neoprene edging. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. D. Blade Axles: 1/2 -inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade - linkage hardware of zinc - plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Bearings: 1. Oil- impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: roll - formed, factory- fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-6 r, rp oration. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 7. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 8. M &I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M &I Heat Transfer Products Ltd. 9. McGill AirFlow LLC. 10. METALAIRE, Inc. 11. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc. 12. Nailor Industries Inc. 13. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 14. Ruskin Company. 15. Vent Products Company, Inc. 16. Young Regulator Company. B. Frames: 1. Hat shaped. 2. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 3. Mitered and welded corners. C. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 2. Opposed -blade design. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick. 5. Blade Edging: Closed -cell neoprene edging. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. D. Blade Axles: 1/2 -inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade - linkage hardware of zinc - plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Bearings: 1. Oil- impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: roll - formed, factory- fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-6 r, C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 2.6 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO Incorporated. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible "; Figures 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." D. Vane Construction: Single wall. 2.7 DUCT- MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. McGill AirFlow LLC. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 9. Ventfabrics, Inc. 10. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Duct - Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible "; Figures 7 -2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7 -3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." ' 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct ' pressure class. C. Vision panel. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-7 d. Hinges and Latches: 1 -b -1 -inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. g Y P e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. _ 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. C. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches[ with outside and inside handles]. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. C. Pressure Relief Access Door: 1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Door: Single wall with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. 3. Operation: Open outward for positive - pressure ducts and inward for negative - pressure ducts. 4. Factory set at 10 -inch wg. 5. Doors close when pressures are within set -point range. 6. Hinge: Continuous piano. 7. Latches: Cam. 8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber. 9. Insulation Fill: 1 -inch- thick, fibrous -glass or polystyrene -foam board. 2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame- retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3 -1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2 -3/4 -inch- wide, 0.028 - inch - thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 - inch - thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. /sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf /inch in the warp and 3601bf /inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. J AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-8 F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, ' synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz. /sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 5301bf /inch in the warp and 440 lbf /inch in the filling. ' 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in ' compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle -iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. ' 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. ' 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without ' deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil - resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement at ' start and stop. 2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2 -ply vinyl fihn supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor - barrier film. i 1. Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg positive and 1.0 -inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. ' 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. 4. Insulation R- value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor - barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4 -inch wg positive and 0.5 -inch wg negative. ' 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. 4. Insulation R- Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. D. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor - barrier film. I AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-9 1. Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg positive and 1.0 -inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3 Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. 4. Insulation R- value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. E. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor - barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg positive and 1.0 -inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. 4. Insulation R- value: Comply with ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1 . F. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor - barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 8 -inch wg positive or negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 5000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Insulation R- value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 . G. Flexible Duct Connectors: Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. Non -Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws. 2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct - insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300- 10 fan unless otherwise indicated. ' D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. ' E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor -air intakes and mixed -air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 6. At each change in direction and at maximum 50 -foot spacing. 7. Upstream and downstream from taming vanes. 8. Control devices requiring inspection. 9. Elsewhere as indicated. H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. I. Access Door Sizes: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. L. For fans developing static pressures of 5 -inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12 -inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60 -inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-11 O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws. P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. Q. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement during start and stop of fans. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300- 12 SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 2. Centrifugal wall ventilators. 3. Ceiling - mounted ventilators. 4. In -line centrifugal fans. 5. Propeller fans. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field ' connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and ' attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA - Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA- Certified Ratings Seal. I HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-1 i PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. PennBarry. B. Housing: Removable, spun - aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one - piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1. Upblast Units: Provide spun - aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow drains. 2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized -steel hinged arrangement permitting service and maintenance. C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward - inclined blades. D. Belt Drives: 1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self - aligning ball bearings. 4. Pulleys: Cast -iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley. 5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. E. Accessories: 1.' Variable -Speed Controller: Solid -state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal- overload protection mounted [inside] [outside] fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2 -inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel- blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. 5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel -blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. PennBarry. u HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-2 F1 1 E. Accessories: 1. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid -state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal- overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit. 3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2 -inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting. 5. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel- blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops. 6. Motorized Dampers: Parallel -blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. 2.3 CEILING - MOUNTED VENTILATORS B. Housing: Heavy -gage, removable, spun - aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet ' cone. C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward - inclined blades. ' D. Belt Drives: 1. Resiliently mounted to housing. ' 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. ' 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self - aligning ball bearings. 4. Pulleys: Cast -iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley. _ 5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. E. Accessories: 1. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid -state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal- overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit. 3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2 -inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting. 5. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel- blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops. 6. Motorized Dampers: Parallel -blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-3 2.3 CEILING - MOUNTED VENTILATORS ' A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. ' 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. PennBarry. ' B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan ' wheel shall be removable for service. D. Grille: Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing. E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug -in. F. Accessories: ' 1. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid -state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-3 2. Manual Starter Switch: Single -pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. 3. Isolation: Rubber -in -shear vibration isolators. 4. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings. 2.4 IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. PennBarry. B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. C. Direct -Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing[; with wheel, inlet cone, and motor on swing -out service door]. D. Belt -Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing. E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. F. Accessories: 1. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid -state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 3. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1 -inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork. 4. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy- coated steel. 2.5 PROPELLER FANS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Loren Cook Company. B. Housing: Galvanized -steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked- enamel finish coat applied after assembly. C. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded - aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast - aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades. D. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. r HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-4 hi E. Fan Drive: 1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 4. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit. 5. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4. 6. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 7. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self - aligning ball bearings. a. Ball- Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L 10 of 100,000 hours. 8. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 9. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through [5] <insert value> hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 10. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 11. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet. F. Accessories: 1. Motor -Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance. 2. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 3. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 4. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen. 5. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid -state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 6. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal- overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2.6 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Certify sound -power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-5 If "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testin g of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA- Certified Ratings Seal. B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA- Certified Ratings Seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. B. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a static deflection of . Vibration - control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." �'I 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-6 1 � I 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal- overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature- control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature- control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. I E. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION 233423 I HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423-7 � I SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 2. Perforated diffusers. 3. Louver face diffusers. 4. Linear bar diffusers. 5. Adjustable bar registers and grilles. 6. Fixed face registers and grilles. 7. Linear bar grilles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume - control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static - pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS ' A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: ' a. Krueger. b. METALAIRE, Inc. C. Price Industries. d. Titus. 2. Material: Aluminum. I DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713- 1 1 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Face Style: Four cone. 6. Mounting: Surface, T -bar. 7. Pattern: Fixed. 8. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. 9. Accessories: a. Equalizing grid. b. Plaster ring. C. Safety chain. d. Wire guard. e. Sectorizing baffles. f. Operating rod extension. Perforated Diffuser: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Krueger. b. METALAIRE, Inc. C. Price Industries. d. Titus. 2. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with [steel] [aluminum] face. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Duct Inlet: Round. 5. Face Style: Flush. 6. Mounting: Surface, T -bar. 7. Pattern Controller: None. 8. Dampers: Opposed blade. 9. Accessories: a. Equalizing grid. b. Plaster ring. C. Safety chain. d. Wire guard. e. Sectorizing baffles. f. Operating rod extension. C. Louver Face Diffuser: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. METALAIRE, Inc. b. Price Industries. C. Titus. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Mounting: Surface, T -bar. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES l �I 233713-2 L 1 a. Krueger. 5. Pattern: Four -way core style. 6. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. 7. Accessories: 2. a. Square to round neck adaptor. 3. b. Adjustable pattern vanes. 4. 5. C. Throw reducing vanes. 6. d. Equalizing grid. e. Plaster ring. f. Safety chain. g. Wire guard. h. Sectorizing baffles. i. Operating rod extension. ' 2.2 CEILING LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS A. Linear Bar Diffuser: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: ' a. Krueger. b. METALAIRE, Inc. C. Price Industries. d. Titus. ' 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. One -Way Deflection Vanes: Extruded construction fixed louvers with removable core. 5. Frame: 1 inch wide. 6. Mounting: Countersunk screw. 7. 8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed -blade assembly. Accessories: Plaster frame. 2.3 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Adjustable Bar Register: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713-3 a. Krueger. b. METALAIRE, Inc. C. Price Industries. d. Titus. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. 5. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 1/2 inch apart. Rear -Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 1/2 inch apart. 6. Frame: 1 -1/4 inches wide. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713-3 7. Mounting: Countersunk screw. 8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. B. Adjustable Bar Grille: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Krueger. b. METALAIRE, Inc. C. Price Industries. d. Titus. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 1/2 inch apart. 5. Rear -Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 1/2 inch apart. 6. Mounting: Countersunk screw. C. Linear Bar Grille: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Krueger. b. Price Industries. C. Titus. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Mounting: Countersunk screw. 5. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling- Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713-4 1 I C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713-5 SECTION 235216 - CONDENSING BOILERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, factory- fabricated and - assembled, gas - fired, fire -tube condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that boiler, accessories, ' and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-1 J unit will be full y operational erational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Source quality- control test reports. C. Field quality- control test reports. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. E. Other Informational Submittals: 1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic testing of piping external to boiler. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements." D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers." E. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial - Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-2 1 1 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Fire -Tube Condensing Boilers: a. Leakage and Materials: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. AERCO International. 2. Heat Transfer Products, Inc. 3. Lochinvar Corporation. 4. Viessmann Manufacturing Co. (US) Inc. 2.2 FIRE -TUBE CONDENSING BOILERS A. Description: Factory- fabricated, - assembled, and - tested, fire -tube condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue -gas vent; combustion -air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water heating service only. B. Heat Exchanger: Nonferrous, corrosion - resistant combustion chamber. C. Pressure Vessel: Carbon steel with welded heads and tube connections. D. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft. E. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to prepurge and postpurge the combustion chamber. 1. Motors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so dri ven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. F. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator. G. Ignition: Spark ignition with 100 percent main -valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision. CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-3 H. Casing: 1. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type IA. 2. Combustion -Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars. 3. Mounting base to secure boiler. a. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to boiler pressure vessel, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when mounting base is anchored to building structure. 2.3 TRIM A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.1, "Power Piping." B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit. C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3 -1/2 -inch- diameter, combination water - pressure and - temperature gage. Gages shall have operating - pressure and - temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range. E. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic. F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose -end gate valve. G. Circulation Pump: Non - overloading, in -line pump with split- capacitor motor having thermal - overload protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures and temperatures. 2.4 CONTROLS A. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features: 1. Control transformer. 2. Set -Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable. 3. Operating Pressure Control: Factory wired and mounted to cycle burner. 4. Low -Water Cutoff and Pump Control: Cycle feedwater pump(s) for makeup water control. B. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner operation. 1. High Cutoff. Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design temperature. 2. Low -Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water. Cutoff switch shall be manual -reset type. 3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual -reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler J i E H_ I' CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-4 1 I combustion -air inlet. 4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for above conditions. 2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections. B. Single -Point Field Power Connection: Factory- installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single -point field power connection to boiler. 1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Wiring shall be numbered and color -coded to match wiring diagram. 3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a [metal ]raceway. 4. Field power interface shall be to circuit breaker. 5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or circuit breaker. 6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 2.6 VENTING KITS A. Combustion -Air Intake: Complete system, , pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet air coupling, and sealant. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust bumer to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test. B. Test and inspect factory- assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Allow Owner access to source quality- control testing of boilers. Notify Architect 14 days in advance of testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing -in for concrete equipment bases, anchor -bolt sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations. 1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations I CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-5 before roughing -in for piping and electrical connections. B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION A. Install gas -fired boilers according to NFPA 54. B. Assemble and install boiler trim. C. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted. D. Install control wiring to field - mounted electrical devices. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance. C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required. D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas -train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required. F. Connect hot -water piping to supply- and return - boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. G. Connect steam and condensate piping to supply -, return-, and blowdown - boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. H. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. 1. Install piping from safety valves to drip -pan elbow and to nearest floor drain. J. Boiler Venting: 1. Install flue venting kit and combustion -air intake. 2. Connect full size to boiler connections. K. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-6 1 r, I L. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air -fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low -limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level and water temperature. b. Set field - adjustable switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. E. Performance Tests: 1. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies and equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance testing. 2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment to comply. 3. Perform field performance tests to determine capacity and efficiency of boilers. a. Test for full capacity. 4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated. 5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance. 6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat produced during tests if building systems are not adequate. 7. Notify Architect in advance of test dates. 8. Document test results in a report and submit to Architect. 1 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to I CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-7 adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and J Training." END OF SECTION 235216 i C C C n L �I J CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-8 1 SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes plate heat exchangers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints and for designing bases. 2. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. C. Delegated - Design Submittal: Details and design calculations for seismic restraints for heat exchangers. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For heat exchanger, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. C. Source quality- control reports. D. Field quality - control reports. E. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700-1 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of domestic -water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. a. Plate, Domestic -Water Heat Exchangers: 1) Brazed Plate Type: One year(s). PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for heat exchangers. B. Seismic Performance: Heat exchangers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE /SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Component Importance Factor is 1.5. 2.2 BRAZED -PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. APV; a brand of SPX Corporation. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 4. Mueller, Paul, Company. 5. Polaris Plate Heat Exchangers. 6. Tranter, Inc. B. Configuration: Brazed assembly consisting of embossed or pressed stainless -steel plates brazed together and two end plates, one with threaded nozzles and one with pattern- embossed plates. C. Construction: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. D. End -Plate Material: Type 316 stainless steel. E. Threaded Nozzles: Type 316 stainless steel. F. Plate Material: Type 316 stainless steel. HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700-2 G. Brazing Material: Copper. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect heat exchangers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. Affix ASME label. B. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one -half times pressure rating before shipment. C. Heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install brazed -plate heat exchanger on custom - designed wall supports anchored to structure as indicated on Drawings. B. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service, and maintenance. D. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers. E. Install shutoff valves at heat - exchanger inlet and outlet connections. F. Install relief valves on heat - exchanger heated -fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full size of valve connection, to floor drain. G. Install vacuum breaker at heat - exchanger steam inlet connection. H. Install thermometer on heat - exchanger and inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on heating -fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." I. Install pressure gages on heat - exchanger and heating -fluid piping. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." ■ 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest ' HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700-3 until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.3 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed fmish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700-4 SECTION 236200 - PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes packaged, air - cooled, refrigerant compressor and condenser units. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1. 2. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation indicating that compressor and condenser units and refrigerants comply. C. Shop Drawings: For compressor and condenser units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air- Conditioning." 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of compressor and condenser units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Compressor failure. b. Condenser coil leak. ' PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200-1 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period (Compressor Only): 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period (Components Other Than Compressor): 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 5. Warranty Period (Condenser Coil Only): Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS, AIR COOLED, 1 TO 5 TONS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Carrier Corporation; Commercial HVAC Systems. 2. Lennox International Inc. 3. Rheem Air Conditioning Division. 4. Ruud Air Conditioning Division. 5. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies. 6. YORK; a Johnson Controls company. B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of compressor, condenser coil, fan, motors, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls. C. Compressor: Scroll, hermetically sealed, with rubber vibration isolators. 1. Motor: Two speed, and includes thermal- and current- sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. 2. Two -Speed Compressor: Include manual- reset, high - pressure switch and automatic - reset, low- pressure switch. D. Refrigerant: R-41 OA . E. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper -tube, aluminum -fin coil; circuited for integral liquid subcooler, with removable drain pan and brass service valves with service ports. F. Condenser Fan: Direct - drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated, totally enclosed fan motor with thermal- overload protection and ball bearings. G. Accessories: 1. Crankcase heater. 2. Cycle Protector: Automatic -reset timer to prevent rapid compressor cycling. 3. Evaporator Freeze Thermostat: Temperature - actuated switch that stops unit when evaporator reaches freezing temperature. 4. Filter -dryer. 3 5. High - Pressure Switch: Automatic -reset switch cycles compressor off on high refrigerant pressure. 6. Liquid -line solenoid. PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200-2 7. Low - Ambient Controller: Cycles condenser fan to permit operation down to 0 deg F. ' 8. Low - Ambient Controller: Controls condenser fan speed to permit operation down to minus 20 deg F. 9. Low - Pressure Switch: Automatic -reset switch cycles compressor off on low refrigerant pressure. ' 10. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing. 11. Thermostatic expansion valve. H. Unit Casing: Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90. 1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings," Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air - Conditioning." B. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound- power -level ratings according to ARI 270. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Install compressor and condenser units on PE mounting base. C. Install compressor and condenser units on concrete base. Concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03. D. Install roof - mounting units on equipment supports specified in Division 07. E. Vibration Isolation: Mount compressor and condenser units on rubber pads with a minimum deflection of 1/4 inch. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." F. Vibration Isolation: Mount compressor and condenser units on restrained spring isolators with a minimum deflection of <Insert measurement. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." G. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. H. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted. ' PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200-3 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. C. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick - connect fittings. Install tubing so it does not interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories. D. Connect refrigerant piping to air- cooled compressor and condenser units; maintain required access to unit. Install furnished field- mounted accessories. Refrigerant piping and specialties are specified in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor operation and unit operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 5. Verify proper airflow over coils. C. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure. END OF SECTION 236200 PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND 236200-4 CONDENSER UNITS n SECTION 237200 - AIR -TO -AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Packaged energy recovery units. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic - restraint details, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Seismic Performance: Air -to -air energy recovery equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE /SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating ' characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: ' 1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation required by Credit EA 4 indicating that equipment and refrigerants comply. 2. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ' ASHRAE 62.1 -2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." C. Shop Drawings: For air -to -air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. AIR -TO -AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237200-1 D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air -to -air energy recovery equipment indicated to comply g � gY rY q with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of air -to -air energy recovery equipment. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be attached. F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air -to -air energy recovery equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. G. Field quality- control reports. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air -to -air energy recovery equipment to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ARI Compliance: 1. Capacity ratings for air -to -air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ARI 1060, "Performance Rating of Air -to -Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment." 2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with ARI 410, "Forced - Circulation Air - Cooling and Air- Heating Coils." C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 -2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." AIR -TO -AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT u r 2. Capacity ratings for air -to -air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air -to -Air Heat Exchangers." D. UL Compliance: 1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812, "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators "; or UL 1815, "Non- ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators." 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of air -to -air energy recovery equipment and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire - suppression system, and partition assemblies. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of equipment supports with actual equipment provided. 1.7 WARRANTY ' A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of air -to -air energy recovery equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ' 1. Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cames. 2. Des Champs Technologies. 3. Engineered Air. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. Loren Cook Company. 6. Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc.; HVAC Advanced Products Division. 7. Mitsubishi Electric Sales Canada Inc. 8. RenewAire LLC. 9. Trane; American Standard Companies, Inc. 10. Venmar CES Inc. B. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 -2004. C. Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion- protection coating and exterior AIR -TO -AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237200-3 finish hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, g P g P minimum 1- inch - thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs. D. Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel. E. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward- curved, centrifugal fan with spring isolators and flexible duct connections. 1. Motor and Drive: Drive type indicated on Drawings. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. 5. Spring isolators on each fan having 1 -inch static deflection. F. Disposable Panel Filters: 1. Comply with NFPA 90A. 2. Filter Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access plenum. 3. Factory- fabricated, viscous - coated, flat -panel type. 4. Thickness: 1 inch. 5. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. 6. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, and with pull and retaining handles. G. Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits. Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation. 1. Indoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure contains relays, starters, and terminal strip. 2. Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure contains relays, starters, and terminal strip. 3. Include fused disconnect switches. H. Accessories: Low - Leakage, Isolation Dampers: Double -skin, airfoil- blade, galvanized -steel dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded -vinyl blade edge seals, in opposed blade arrangement with steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized -steel frame, with operating rods connected with a common linkage, and electric damper operator factory wired. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at I -inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4 -inch wg. Duct flanges. Rubber -in -shear isolators for ceiling - mounted units. AIR -TO -AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237200-4 it J 4. Hinged access doors with quarter -turn latches. ' 5. Drain pans for condensate removal complying with ASHRAE 62.1 -2004. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. ' B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air -to -air energy recovery equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine roughing -in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation. ' D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural . Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure air -to -air energy recovery equipment to structural support with ' anchor bolts. B. Install wind and seismic restraints according to manufacturers' written instructions. Wind and ' seismically restrained vibration isolation roof -curb rails are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Suspended Units: Suspend and brace units from structural -steel support frame using threaded ' steel rods and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and ' Equipment." D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. E. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Pipe drains from units and drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC pipe and solvent - welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection. ' 1. Requirements for Low - Emitting Materials: a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated ' according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). ' AIR -TO -AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237200-5 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors. D. Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." E. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections. 1. Install electrical devices furnished with units but not factory mounted. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Adjust seals and purge. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points. 5. Set field - adjustable switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Air -to -air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air -to -air energy recovery units. END OF SECTION 237200 AIR -TO -AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237200-6 SECTION 238126 - SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes split- system air- conditioning and heat -pump units consisting of separate evaporator -fan and compressor- condenser components. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation indicating that equipment and refrigerants comply. 2. Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62. 1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62. 1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS 238126-1 L and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split- system air - conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. b. For Parts: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. C. For Labor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Carrier Corporation; Home Comfort and HVAC Building & Industrial Systems. 2. Lennox International Inc. 3. Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc.; HVAC Advanced Products Division. 4. SANYO North America Corporation; SANYO Fisher Company. 5. Trane; a business of American Standard companies. 6. YORK; a Johnson Controls company. 2.2 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS) A. Wall- Mounted, Evaporator -Fan Components: 1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. 2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal - expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240. 3. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. 4. Fan Motors: a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. C. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. d. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS 238126-2 I� e. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 6. Condensate Drain Pans: a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection. 1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. 2) Depth: A minimum of 1 inch deep. b. Single -wall, galvanized -steel sheet. C. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. 1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1. d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. 7. Air Filtration Section: a. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section: 1) Comply with NFPA 90A. 2) Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3) Filter - Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum. b. Disposable Panel Filters: 1) Factory- fabricated, viscous - coated, flat -panel type. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. 4) Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, and hinged; with pull and retaining handles. C. Extended - Surface, Disposable Panel Filters: 1) Factory- fabricated, dry, extended - surface type. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Media: Fibrous material formed into deep -V- shaped pleats and held by self - supporting wire grid. 4) Media -Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard. 5) Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel, with gaskets and fasteners; suitable for bolting together into built -up filter banks. I SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR - CONDITIONERS 238126-3 �,11 2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (6 TONS OR LESS) A. Air- Cooled, Compressor- Condenser Components: 1. Casing: Steel, fmished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. 2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current- sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. a. Compressor Type: Scroll. b. Two -speed compressor motor with manual -reset high - pressure switch and automatic -reset low- pressure switch. C. Refrigerant Charge: R -410A . d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 210/240. 3. Fan: Aluminum- propeller type, directly connected to motor. 4. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal- overload protection. 5. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F. 6. Mounting Base: Polyethylene. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Automatic -reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. B. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft - annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory- insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends. C. Drain Hose: For condensate. D. Additional Monitoring: 1. Monitor constant and variable motor loads. 2. Monitor variable- frequency -drive operation. 3. Monitor economizer cycle. 4. Monitor cooling load. 5. Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator -fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS 238126-4 1 C. Install ground- mounted, compressor- condenser components on 4 -inch- thick, reinforced concrete base that is 4 inches larger, on each side, than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and ' formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base. D. Install ground- mounted, compressor- condenser components on polyethylene mounting base. E. Install roof - mounted, compressor- condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium- ; , plated fasteners. F. Install seismic restraints. G. Install compressor- condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 1 inch. See Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." H. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick - connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 1. Water Coil Connections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section " Hydronic Piping." Connect hydronic piping to supply and return coil connections with shutoff -duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling -duty valve and union or flange on the return connection. B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 1 SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS 238126-5 D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION 238126 SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS 238126-6 SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation indicating that equipment and refrigerants comply. 2. Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62. 1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality - control test reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air - Conditioning." FAN COIL UNITS 238219-1 it PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In the Fan- Coil -Unit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for each fan-coil unit is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 DUCTED FAN -COIL UNITS A. Description: Factory- packaged and - tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995. B. Coil Section Insulation: 1/2 -inch thick coated glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916. 1. Fire - Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame - spread index of 25 and smoke - developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. C. Drain Pans: Plastic. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. D. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked - enamel finish and removable access panels. E. Cabinets: Steel with baked - enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color. 1. Mixing Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis with outdoor- and retum -air, formed -steel dampers. 2. Dampers: Galvanized steel with extruded -vinyl blade seals, flexible -metal jamb seals, and interlocking linkage. F. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52. 1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Washable Foam: 70 percent arrestance and 3 MERV. 2. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV. 3. Pleated Cotton - Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV. G. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering -water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain. H. Direct -Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted -steel wheels, and ii H_ �1 FAN COIL UNITS 238219-2 P ainted -steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls. I. Belt -Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single -speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the cabinet. Aluminum or painted -steel wheels, and painted -steel or galvanized -steel fan scrolls. i 1. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." J. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L copper tube with wrought- copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and outlet. ' 1. Three -way, modulating control valve for heating coil. 2. Hose Kits: Minimum 400 -psig working pressure, and operating temperatures from 33 to 211 deg F. Tag hose kits to equipment designations. 1 a. Length: 24 inches. b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan - coil -unit connection size. 3. Two -Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full -port, chrome- plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600 -prig minimum CWP rating and blowout -proof stem. 4. Calibrated- Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type; 125 -psig working pressure, ' 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends, and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. 5. Automatic Flow- Control Valve: Brass or ferrous -metal body; 300 -psig working pressure at 250 deg F; with removable, corrosion - resistant, tamperproof, self - cleaning piston spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent over differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig. ' 6. Y- Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast -iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125 -psig working pressure, with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless -steel basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 hose -end, full -port, ball -type blowdown valve in drain connection. 7. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME B 16.22. ' K. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Verify locations of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. C. Install new filters in each fan -coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion. D. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate I FAN COIL UNITS 238219-3 I n general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect piping to fan- coil -unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if shipped loose. 3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction. E. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and - malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 238219 FAN COIL UNITS 238219-4 �i SECTION 238239 - UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and hot -water coils. 2. Propeller unit heaters with hot -water coils. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Location and size of each field connection. 3. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality - control test reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." UNIT HEATERS 238239-1 H_ C. ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90. 1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air - Conditioning." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. C C L CABINET UNIT HEATERS Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 2. Carrier Corporation. 3. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation. 4. Marley Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 5. McQuay International. 6. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 7. Trane. Description: A factory- assembled and - tested unit complying with ARI 440. Coil Section Insulation: Glass -fiber insulation; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be aluminum -foil facing to prevent erosion of glass fibers. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Thermal Conductivity (k- Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Fire - Hazard Classification: Maximum flame - spread index of 25 and smoke - developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 4. Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. Cabinet: Steel with baked - enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect. 1. Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0528- inch - thick, galvanized, sheet steel, removable panels with channel- formed edges secured with tamperproof cam fasteners. 2. Recessing Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet. 3. Control Access Door: Key operated. 4. Extended.Piping Compartment: [8- inch -] <Insert dimension> wide piping end pocket. 5. False Back: Minimum 0.0428 -inch- thick steel, finished to match cabinet. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Washable Foam: 70 percent arrestance and 3 MERV. 2. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV. 3. Pleated: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV. UNIT HEATERS H 0 I fl J HI H 238239-2 J 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 F. Hot -Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering -water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain. G. Fan and Motor Board: Removable. 1. Fan: Forward curved, [high static, ]double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor. Thermoplastic or painted -steel wheels, and aluminum, painted- steel, or galvanized -steel fan scrolls. 2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 3. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. H. Factory, Hot -Water Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L copper tube with wrought- copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet and outlet. Hose Kits: Minimum 400 -psig working pressure, and operating temperatures from 33 to 211 deg F. Tag hose kits to equipment designations. a. Length: 24 inches. b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to cabinet unit heater connection size. 2. Two - Piece, Ball Valves: Bronze body with full -port, chrome- plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600 -psig minimum CWP rating and blowout -proof stem. 3. Calibrated- Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type, 125 -psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venture, connection for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends, and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. 4. Y- Pattern, Hot -Water Strainers: Cast -iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125 -psig minimum working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless -steel basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 threaded pipe and full -port ball valve in strainer drain connection. 5. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME B 16.22. I. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection. PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. McQuay International. 2. Trane. B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers. C. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls. UNIT HEATERS 238239-3 D. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory- assembled and - tested propeller unit heater before shipping. E. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. F. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fm diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical units. G. Hot -Water Coil: Test and rate hot -water propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33. Copper tube, minimum 0.025 -inch wall thickness, with mechanically bonded aluminum fns spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering -water temperature of 325 deg F, with manual air vent. Test for leaks to 350 psig underwater. H. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi. I. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in "" Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated. J. Control Devices: Wall- mounting thermostat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers[ and seismic restraints]. Vibration isolators and seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all- thread hanger rods and spring hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Install wall - mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. E. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply -water connection and union and calibrated balancing valve on return -water connection of unit heater. F. Install new filters in each fan -coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion. G. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. �, I u D 11 D u J 7 UNIT HEATERS 238239-4 ri H. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. I. Connect piping to cabinet unit heater's factory, hot -water piping package. Install the piping package if shipped loose. J. Connect supply and return ducts to cabinet unit heaters with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." K. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995. L. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." M. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 238239 UNIT HEATERS 238239-5 SECTION 238316 - RADIANT- HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes radiant heating piping, including pipes, fittings, and piping specialties. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of radiant heating pipe, fitting, manifold, specialty, and control. B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves, manifolds, controls, and support assemblies, and their attachments to building structure. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. REHAU. 2. Uponor Wirsbo Co. 3. Watts Radiant, Inc.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. B. Pipe Material: PEX plastic according to ASTM F 876. C. Oxygen Barrier: Limit oxygen diffusion through the tube to maximum 0.10 mg per cu. m/day at 104 deg F according to DIN 4726. D. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, metal insert and copper crimp rings. E. Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig and 180 deg F. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLDS A. Manifold: Minimum NPS 1, copper. B. Main Shutoff Valves: RADIANT- HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316-1 fl , 1. Factory installed on supply and return connections. 2. Two -piece body. 3. Body: Brass or bronze. 4. Ball: Chrome- plated bronze. 5. Seals: PTFE. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. C. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Key furnished with valve, or screwdriver bit. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. D. Balancing Valves: 1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type. 2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel. 3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer. 4. Seat: PTFE. 5. Visual Flow Indicator: Flowmeter with visible indication in a clear plastic cap at top of valve. 6. Differential Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable meter to measure loss across calibrated orifice. 7. Handle Style: Lever or knob, with memory stop to retain set position if used for shutoff. 8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. E. Zone Control Valves: 1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type. 2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel. 3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer. 4. Seat: PTFE. 5. Actuator: Replaceable electric motor. 6. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. F. Thermometers: 1. Mount on supply and return connections. 2. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, 2 -inch diameter. 3. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. 4. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer. 5. Dial: Satin - faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Black metal. 7. Window: Plastic. 7 H_; RADIANT- HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316-2 1 8. Connector: Rigid, back type. 9. Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury- filled bulb in copper - plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. ' G. Mounting Brackets: Copper, or plastic or copper -clad steel, where in contact with manifold. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Cable Ties: 1. Fungus -inert, self - extinguishing, 1- piece, self - locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 2. Minimum Width: 1/8 inch. 3. Tensile Strength: 20 lb, minim 4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. B. Floor- Mounting Staples: 1. Steel, with corrosion - resistant coating and smooth finish without sharp edges. 2. Minimum Thickness: 3/32 inch. 3. Width: Minimum, wider than tubing. C. Floor- Mounting Clamps: 1. Two bolt, steel, with corrosion- resistant coating and smooth finish without sharp edges. 2. Minimum Thickness: 3/32 inch. 3. Width: Minimum, wider than tubing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Install the following types of radiant heating piping for the applications described: 1. Piping in Exterior Pavement: PEX . 2. Piping in Interior Reinforced- Concrete Floors: PEX . 3. Piping in Level Fill Concrete Floors (Not Reinforced): PEX . 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping ' systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop or Coordination Drawings. ' B. Install radiant heating piping continuous from the manifold through the heated panel and back to the manifold without piping joints in heated panels. ' RADIANT- HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316-3 C. Connect radiant piping to manifold in a reverse -return arrangement. D. Do not bend pipes in radii smaller than manufacturer's minimum bend radius dimensions. E. Install manifolds in accessible locations, or install access panels to provide maintenance access as required in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." F. Refer to Division 23 Section " Hydronic Piping" for pipes and connections to hydronic systems and for glycol - solution fill requirements. G. Fire- and Smoke - Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." H. Piping in Exterior Pavement: 1. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to reinforcement using cable ties. 2. Space cable ties a maximum of 18 inches o.c., and at center of turns or bends. 3. Maintain 3 -inch minimum cover. 4. Install a sleeve of 3/8 -inch- thick, foam -type insulation or PE pipe around tubing and extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints to provide maximum clearance for saw cut. 5. Maintain minimum 40 -psig pressure in piping during concrete placement and continue for 24 hours after placement. I. Piping in Interior Reinforced - Concrete Floors: 1. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to reinforcement using cable ties. 2. Space cable ties a maximum of 18 inches o.c., and at center of turns or bends. 3. Maintain 2 -inch minimum cover. 4. Install a sleeve of 3/8 -inch- thick, foam -type insulation or PE pipe around tubing and extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints to provide maximum clearance for saw cut. 5. Maintain minimum 40 -psig pressure in piping during concrete placement and continue for 24 hours after placement. J. Piping in Level Fill Concrete Floors (Not Reinforced): 1. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to subfloor using tracks, clamps, or staples. 2. Space tracks, clamps, or staples a maximum of 18 inches o.c., and at center of turns or bends. 3. Maintain 3/4 -inch minimum cover. 4. Install a sleeve of 3/8 -inch- thick, foam -type insulation or PE pipe around tubing and extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints to provide maximum clearance for saw cut. 5. Maintain minimum 40 -psig pressure in piping during the concrete pour and continue for 24 hours during curing. E ri RADIANT- HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316-4 1 K. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure integrity of piping and as approved by Architect. ' L. After system balancing has been completed, mark balancing valves to permanently indicate final position. M. Perform the following adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. 2. Check operation of zone control valves. 3. Set temperature controls so all zones call for full flow. 4. Purge air from piping. N. After the concrete or plaster heating panel has cured as recommended by concrete supplier, operate radiant heating system as follows: 1. Start system heating at a maximum of 10 deg F above the ambient radiant panel temperature, and increase 10 deg F each following day until design temperature is achieved. 2. For freeze protection, operate at a maximum of 60 deg F supply -water temperature. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare radiant heating piping for testing as follows: 1. Open all isolation valves and close bypass valves. 2. Open and verify operation of zone control valves. 3. Flush with clean water, and clean strainers. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Subject piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure but not more than 100 psig. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning radiant heating piping components that do not pass tests, and retest as specified above. D. Prepare a written report of testing. END OF SECTION 238316 I RADIANT- HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316-5 1 1. General: t (1) The exhaust removal system must provide 100% complete evacua- tion of all diesel fumes at the source from start up to exit of the appara- tus from the fire station. The diesel exhaust removal system shall be capable of reaching to the undercarriage of the vehicle tailpipe located anywhere from 10 to 75 feet away from the exiting door threshold. The system must be able to accommodate drive through and back in bays to meet all the needs of the fire department. I Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 1.01 SCOPE. Vehicle Exhaust Removal System Performance and Technical Specifications A. The bidder shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary, to put in working operation a complete system to remove both diesel and automotive exhaust gases, and particulate of operating vehicles within the confines of specified fire station(s). All necessary controls, motors, fittings, louvers, ductwork, blower(s), labor and all other equipment and materials specified shall be part of the bidders work. B. All items of equipment and materials described in these specifications are to be furnished installed and placed into proper operating condition in accordance with good practice and manufactureris written or published instructions. C All workmanship and materials shall be in accordance with applicable codes and regulations. Le., SMACNA. BOCA, NEC, ASTM, UBC, UMC, NFPA, AMCA. and IMC. Such codes and regulations are to be considered part of these specifications. D The bidder shall warranty all materials, equipment and workmanship for a pe- riod of two (2) year from the date of final acceptance of the completed job, against original defects of material and workmanship, excessive wear and deterioration. Repairs shall be made at the bidders expense. E Bidder shall install a complete automatic disconnect Diesel Exhaust Removal System, that addresses the problem of diesel fumes in the fire department sta- tion house that will not interfere with normal day -to -day operations. The system shall be a Sliding Balancer Track type system that has the following perfor- mance criteria. 238400 -1 C (2) The system must not affect personnel boarding the apparatus. Hose loops shall not hang any lower then seven feet fropm the bay floor. The hose assembly shall not touch or drag on the bay floor. (3) The exhaust system shall not block doorways, exits, and aisles in the appa- ratus bay, which could endanger the welfare of fire personnel visitors. (4) To protect the apparatus electrical system from any possible damage, the system bid shall not incorporate any type of electromagnetic device that requi- res the apparatus to be utilized as and electrical ground for the systems operation. (5) Due to the harmful effects of diesel exhaust, the system must be designed and capable of capturing 100% of the exhaust gas and particulate even in the event of a complete power failure. The system shall not detach itself from the apparatus for any reason during a power failure other then normal exiting of the apparatus bay. No exception to this requirement will be allowed. 1.02 STANDARD PRODUCTS: Equipment and materials provided for the system installa- tions) shall be a standard product of manufacturer's currently engaged in the manu- facturing of automatic vehicle exhaust removal systems. Where the requirement calls for a packaged exhaust system to be provided, all items shall be the product of the manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: All workmanship, manufacturing procedures, airflow design, and materials shall be performance guaranteed. If any findings or test studies reveal improper materials, defective components or inadequate performance as outlined in the performance /technical specifications, the bidder shall remove and replace the materials in question. 1.04 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY. The bidder shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of two (2) year from the date of the final acceptance of the completed job against original defects of material and workmanship, or excessive wear or deterioration. Defects shall be made good at the bidders expense with no cost or obligation to the Owner. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: The bidder shall be solely responsible for the delivery, storage, and handling of all products. Any equipment placed in storage shall be protected from weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. 1.06 BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS: Bids will only be accepted from companies that have an established reputation in the field of manufacturing and installing Diesel Exhaust Rem- oval Systems. The bidder must be established in the business of Diesel Exhaust Removal Systems for a minimum of no less then eight- (8) years. Bidder shall show proof that their system has been field tested and proven by supplying a list of not less then 100 fire department references (seven withing the state the municipality is going to bid) to include a phone number and contact name. Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -2 r� 2. PRODUCTS: 2.01 SYSTEM MANUFACTURER: All equipment specified herein shall be a standard product of the manufacturer, or an approved equal. An approved equal shall be determined by the fire department. The bidder shall provide all labor and materials required to install and operate the Diesel Exhaust Removal System which shall be included in the following performance and technical specifications. Any adjustments involving equipment locations within the building shall be determined in the field and approved by the fire department. 2.02 AIR MOVING DEVICES: A. Centrifugal Fans: The fan shall be a direct drive centrifugal type, high pressure, single width, single inlet as required or indicated. Impeller wheels shall be of a radial design for high static pressure performance. Impeller wheels shall be spark resistance and made of Almag material to prevent static electricity build up. The impeller shall be dynamically and static balanced, and of the non - overloading type to provide maximum efficiency while achieving quiet, vibration -free operation. ' The fan housing shall be manufactured from a nonferrous material - Almag (or) approved equivalent. The fan motor and assembly shall be mounted on a stainless steel frame for durability in any type of weather conditions. The base shall have ' four (4) pre punched openings at bottom of fan base for field attachment to either an exterior wall or roof structure. ' B. Fan motor and bearing: All 1 to 10 horsepower motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The bearings shall be self - aligned; ball bearing type permanently sealed and lubri- cated. Fan shafts shall be steel and rotate in a non - sparking TEFLON seal to pre- vent hot gases coming in contact with the motor bearings. The exhaust discharge outlet shall be in compliance with ACGIH recommendations and EPA requirements ' (min. of 40 " above roofline). Air intakes, windows, cascade systems, prevailing currents, communication equipment and building aesthetics shall be considered in the final location of the fan. Silencers shall be provided when fan sound decibels ' exceed 64 Dba. C. Performance: The Fan Capacity shall be sized as such as to deliver the required CFM at each hose drop the vehicle engine exhaust (based on an airtight connection at tailpipe), lengths of ductworks, elbows, branches, shut down. Y's, etc. which accumulate the ' static pressure at the field inlet. The manufacture's provided fan(s) shall be performance guaranteed. ' D. Location: The fan shall be located on the outside of the fire station as far away from any li- ving quarters as possible so that firefighters would not be disturbed by the system ' activation. No blower fans shall be mounted in side the fire station. No exception. Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -3 0 2.03 ELECTRICAL CONTROLLERS A. Controller type: The controller shall be manufactured and delivered as an Operating System with one series controller manufactured by the bidder or An equal to the specifications to follow. B. Electrical controllers: The electrical controller offered shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as a complete electrical system for enclosed industrial control panels. No exceptions. (1) Electrical controllers shall be UL listed /approved and manufac- tured in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories standard UL -508 enclosed industrial control panels. The electrical trolley shall include a limited energy control circuit. Enclosures shall be NEMA 12 rated and UL listed as Type 12. The electrical enclo- sure shall be provided and mounted in an electrical enclosure to restrict access to internal components of controller by only authorized entry. C. Electrical Contactors: Contactors shall be Allen Bradley Industrial Electrical Contractors, provided with the appropriate adjustable overload relays to meet the proper full load amperage of motor that is outlined in these specifications. The Contactor shall conform to the following standards: BS -5424, VDE0660, and be approved by UL Certification as an approved component. D. Control Transformer: Shall be UL listed industrial control circuit transformer with primary and secondary fuse blocks. Transformer shall be provided with multitap primary 208V through 480V, AC, and 24V through 120V secondary. E. Electrical Timer: Shall be solid state five- (5) minute adjustable timer. The operating logic shall complete this cycle. Input voltage shall be applied to the timer at all times. Upon closure of a normally open isolated start switch, the load energizes and remains energized as long as the switch is closed. When the start switch opens, the ti- ming cycle shall start. At the end of the preset time delay, the load de- energizes and the timer is ready for a new timing cycle. Timer shall be a UL recognized component under file number E65038. F. Engine Start Switch: Shall be of an engine pressure sensing type, capable of recognizing the output pressure of any type of motor vehicle exhaust. The electrical contact shall be dry type or not to exceed 24V. Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -4 7 t I � G. Electrical Wiring Shall be run in wire channel to allow for easier identification of wiring circuit and appearance. All wiring circuitry shall meet UL listed for proper bending radiuses and terminations. H. Electrical Terminal Block: Shall be 600 V, UL rated and recognized. It shall provide individual connection points for remote controls, power and motor connections. I. Electrical Wiring Schematic: Shall be provided with each electrical control box supplied. Wiring schematic shall show internal circuitry as well as all primary and secondary connections to the controller. This schematic shall be provided as a "D" size print drawing. J. Electrical Interface: To protect the apparatus and communications, designs that incorporate the use of a controller that utilizes or produces an electrical frequency transmission or any possibility of electrical back -feed which may interfere with a central services communication or onboard vehicle computer logic or navigational equipment will not be accepted. K. Controller Performance: It shall be designed to sense the output pressure, which is normally generated by any internal combustion engine designed to propel a motor vehicle. The opera- ting logic shall be designed to complete this cycle. At any point in time when a collection device is connected to a motor vehicle's exhaust tailpipe, at which time the operator manually or automatically starts the vehicle, this controller shall automatically sense the engine's output pressure and in turn energize the electrical contactors which will provide proper full load amperage to the exhaust removal system fan motor. The controller through the use of an adjustable timer shall keep the contactors energized for up to five minutes in accordance with the station response requirement. If the responding vehicle does not disconnect from the exhaust ventilation system in less than the designated setting, a temperature override switch shall be incorporated to override the timer delay relay to ensure continuous system operation. This automated function will work for as long as the exhaust gas temperature is in excess of setting on heat sensor located in the ductwork. This cycle shall not allow the electrical contactor, which energizes the exhaust fan, to short cycle or stop the fan while the system is connected to an operating vehicle. Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -5 2.04 DUCTWORK SYSTEM: A. Ductwork type and materials: Shall be UMC class C or SMACNA class 11 product conveying. It must meet or exceed criteria for construction and performance as outlined in Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, SMACNA. Materials of construction unless other- wise specified for all ductwork and fittings shall be a minimum G -90 galvanized sheet metal in accordance with ASTM -A525 and A527. Only when specified, type 304 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A240 shall be provided. B. Ductwork sizing and gauges: All ductwork subject to positive or negative pressure shall be of round spiral pipe construction, with the range of available sizes not to exceed 10 inches in diame- ter. Duct gauge shall depend on diameter and a minimum operating pressure of 8 inches water gauge. Acceptable gauge and reinforcement requirements shall be in accordance to the following. Inner duct diameter 4" - 7" dia. shall be 26 gauge standard spiral pipe and 9" - 10" dia. shall be 24 -gauge standard spiral pipe. C. Ductwork Fittings: All exhaust fittings shall be round and have a wall thickness 2 gauges (one even gauge number) heavier than the lightest allowable gauge of the downstream section of duct to which they are connected. Air duct branch entrances shall be factory fabricated fittings or factory fabricated duct /tap assemblies. Fittings shall be constructed so that air stream converge at angles no greater then 45 degree. All seams shall be continuous stitch welded and if necessary internally sealed to insure airtightness. Turning elbows shall be stitch - welded and used for all dia- meters and pressures. They shall be fabricated of 24 gauge galvanized steel and constructed as two piece with continuous welded seam construction fittings. Tapered body fittings shall be used manifold. No exceptions. D. Ductwork Design Velocities: Shall be a minimum of 4000 - 4500 feet /minute transport velocity in metal ductwork which is the standard for design. Capture velocity shall be 5500 - 6000 FPM to extract 100 % of the exhaust gases. E. External Ductwork: Shall be sized for the exact inlet and outlet of the exhaust fan blower. If the fire station is exposed to unusual inclement weather, unusual levels of acid rain or is within 3 miles of salt water, stainless steel shall considered for all exterior duct work components. An exhaust rain cap shall be supplied and manufactured in accordance with EPA standard for free draft rain cap requirements. Included as an integral part of this rain cap shall be a back draft damper to provide protec- tion from rain and other inclement weather or air. i [.-1 u Fill Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -6 1 ' 2.05 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT: A. Scope of System Operation: The vehicle exhaust removal system shall capture 100 % of the exhaust emissions directly at the tailpipe of the vehicle and exhaust those emissions to a specified area safely outside the building. The operating controller shall be designed to complete this cycle. A pneumatically operated collection nozzle shall be connected to the motor vehicle's exhaust tailpipe, when the vehicle is started by the driver, the exhaust fan will automatically energize and vent the toxic gases directly to the outside of the building. This automatic feature shall be achieved by means of a pressure sensor located inside the exhaust ducting; this pressure sen- t sor shall sense the engines output pressure upon the first stroke of the engine pis- ton and energize the fan starter. The automatic controller shall use an adjustable timer to keep the contactors energized for a designated period of time. Should the operating vehicle not exit the station within the designated preset time period, a temperature override switch shall be incorporated to override the timer relay. This override shall be achieved by means of an adjustable temperature sensor located inside the exhaust ductwork. The adjustable temperature (heat) sensor shall have a range of 90 -130 degrees. If the vehicle is still running inside the sta- tion longer then anticipated, the heat sensor will override the timer relay. The ' pneumatic connection device shall stay connected to the vehicle tailpipe as it travels to the exit door in a pre- engineered sliding track system. The sliding track shall be securely attached to the building structure and supports a flexible hose assembly that moves with vehicle inside the station. As the vehicle nears the exit door, the pneumatic nozzle connection located at the tailpipe shall release its air pressure automatically therefore releasing the nozzle from the tailpipe. This shall be accomplished by means of un uncoupling valve strategically located on the sliding track. After the system releases the vehicle tailpipe at the door, it shall retract passively and smoothly into a convenient storage position. When the ' vehicle returns to the station, a system operator manually pulls the flexible hose assembly to the entrance door. The system operator holds the pneumatic connection device apploximately 18" from the floor and at the door threshold. The system operator, without bending over, attaches the pneumatic connection device just inside the door threshold as the vehicle enters the station, at which time the exhaust fan motor energizes. The vehicle driver momentarily stops the vehicle when the tailpipe is just at the door threshold (a backup man will notify the driver when it is time to stop the vehicle). Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -7 F. Exhaust Penetrations: To protect the fire departments best interest ductwork shall only penetrate exterior walls rather than a roof penetration. In all cases when making a wall penetration ' through masonry or concrete walls it shall be done by the use of a professional core - drilling machine. The core drilling shall be properly sized to reduce the dia- meter of the opening to the smallest possible size. Only after all possible avenues ' for wall penetration are exhausted, shall the roof penetration be accepted. The original roofing contractor shall perform the work if possible to insure any warranties on the existing roof are not voided. If the original roofing contractor can not be notified a licensed roofing contractor shall be used. ' 2.05 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT: A. Scope of System Operation: The vehicle exhaust removal system shall capture 100 % of the exhaust emissions directly at the tailpipe of the vehicle and exhaust those emissions to a specified area safely outside the building. The operating controller shall be designed to complete this cycle. A pneumatically operated collection nozzle shall be connected to the motor vehicle's exhaust tailpipe, when the vehicle is started by the driver, the exhaust fan will automatically energize and vent the toxic gases directly to the outside of the building. This automatic feature shall be achieved by means of a pressure sensor located inside the exhaust ducting; this pressure sen- t sor shall sense the engines output pressure upon the first stroke of the engine pis- ton and energize the fan starter. The automatic controller shall use an adjustable timer to keep the contactors energized for a designated period of time. Should the operating vehicle not exit the station within the designated preset time period, a temperature override switch shall be incorporated to override the timer relay. This override shall be achieved by means of an adjustable temperature sensor located inside the exhaust ductwork. The adjustable temperature (heat) sensor shall have a range of 90 -130 degrees. If the vehicle is still running inside the sta- tion longer then anticipated, the heat sensor will override the timer relay. The ' pneumatic connection device shall stay connected to the vehicle tailpipe as it travels to the exit door in a pre- engineered sliding track system. The sliding track shall be securely attached to the building structure and supports a flexible hose assembly that moves with vehicle inside the station. As the vehicle nears the exit door, the pneumatic nozzle connection located at the tailpipe shall release its air pressure automatically therefore releasing the nozzle from the tailpipe. This shall be accomplished by means of un uncoupling valve strategically located on the sliding track. After the system releases the vehicle tailpipe at the door, it shall retract passively and smoothly into a convenient storage position. When the ' vehicle returns to the station, a system operator manually pulls the flexible hose assembly to the entrance door. The system operator holds the pneumatic connection device apploximately 18" from the floor and at the door threshold. The system operator, without bending over, attaches the pneumatic connection device just inside the door threshold as the vehicle enters the station, at which time the exhaust fan motor energizes. The vehicle driver momentarily stops the vehicle when the tailpipe is just at the door threshold (a backup man will notify the driver when it is time to stop the vehicle). Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -7 The system operator, standing straight up with the pneumatic slide valve in his left hand, shall slide the connection device up against a flanged adapter attached to the vehicle tailpipe; the operator will then inflate the pneumatic nozzle around tailpipe. The cycle is completed as the exhaust fan starts and vents the toxic gases with the pneumatic connection nozzle firmly attached to the vehicle exhaust pipe. The vehicle then proceeds to its designated resting position. B. Sliding Track: The sliding track shall be a one -piece continuous extruded aluminium track in a minimum length of 20 feet. The construction profile shall be of a Boxloc type pro- file, which shall adhere to the following dimensions. Track height 3 1/8", width 1 1/2"', thickness 1/8". The track material shall be aircraft aluminium alloy type AA- 06063. The aluminium track shall be an extruded design that shall incorpo- rate three separate and functioning channels. The three channels shall be for the following, mounting channel, trolley channel and the Boxloc channel. Each of these sections performs a specific function to make the system work effectively. The mounting compartment shall be designed to accept the slider bars (which shall be provided with factory supplied vertical legs and riser clamp duct connection) and allow positioning along the full length of the slotted track mounting channel. The mounting channel shall also accommodate the com- pressed airlines for the purposes of safe storage and appearance. The trolley channel shall allow the trolley /balancer /hose assembly to glide to the door threshold in a safe and effective manner. The Boxloc channel shall allow the whole track to remain rigid as it hangs from factory supplied leg supports and also shall provide an area to attach bolts for splicing additional tracks together for systems over 20 feet long. The overall extruded track lengths shall be 20 foot standard and weight no more then 35 lbs. The track system shall be equipped with end stops that limit travel of flex hose as the vehicle exits the building. The end stop shall be fabricated of zinc plated steel in a U shape form, with a rubber end stop on the impact end. It shall be attached by using a 1/4"' molded locking bolt. The end stop shall be secured to the track with no loss than (2) 1/4 bolts and locking nuts located on the underside of the track. For security, a 114" bolt shall be drilled through the ends of each track system to insure that the trolley/ balancer assembly(s) roll no further then the end of the track system. C. Support leas: Support legs shall be manufactured and provided by the supplier of the primary exhaust removal system. (Equipment Manufacturer). This is to ensure that the unit is installed as a complete system including the mounting hardware. Supports shall be zinc - plated telescoping adjustable type and shall be capable of adjusting travel lengths from 6 inches to 13 feet. A minimum of one support with appropriate bracing shall be provided for every 10 linear feet of track profile. The support legs shall consist of a square outer profile with dimensions no less than 1 3/4" OD. with 3/8" fastening hardware provided. Inner leg shall be a C profile type with continuous slot along its traveling length. Welded securely to the bottom of C profile shall be a mounting foot complete with a slider bar and 3/8" hardware necessary for mounting the horizontal track to the mounting channel Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -8 r� L11 l P, F 7 J system. The support leg shall be equipped with round tubular zinc - plated steel with pressed ends. The angle shall be completely adjustable to the leg support and mounted perpendicular and parallel to direction of the track. The typical support angle shall be 45degrees from the center line of the factory provided support leg. The standard leg shall be capable of meeting a Seismic 4 requirement. D. Double Track Joiner Plate: Should the exhaust removal system require a double track type system due to the length of the apparatus bays, the tracks shall be attached in the following man- ner. The joiner plate shall be constructed from a minimum of ° " thick zinc - plated material and be designed to connect two parallel tracks to make a double track system to accommodate an apparatus bay over 40 feet in length. The joiner plate shall be 10" x 8" flat zinc - plated steel and designed to attach the two tracks to a single factory supplied support leg. The steel plate shall have (6) 3/8" holes drilled 6 7/8" apart to accommodate the slider bar provided with factory sup- port legs. The joiner plate shall have two slider bars attached to the plate and shall be located on the outside edges of plate, these slider bars shall fit into the boxloc track mounting channel for a simple and secure attachment of the plate to boxloc track. The center portion of the joiner plate shall provide attachment for the factory supplied support leg. E. Track Splicing Assembly: The track splicing assembly shall be fabricated for the sole function of connecting two extruded aluminum boxloc sliding tracks end -to -end. Track splice shall be manufactured of galvanized steel in two parts and utilized as a clamping device. This clamp shall accurately secure both tracks together in a fashion, which shall eliminate any possibility of obstructing the trolley assembly as it passes through this connection point of track system. Connecting length of splice shall be a mini- mum of 15 3/4" long and fabricated of 14 gauge material. Four 1 /4" bolts with lock nuts shall pass directly through internal partition of boxloc track. The splicing sleeve shall fit externally around the outside dimension of extruded aluminum track profile. F. Riser Clamp_Assembl)C. The riser clamp shall be fabricated as a one piece welded assembly and manufactured to create the transfer of the hard spiral pipe joined at the top and flexible duct connection at the bottom. The riser clamp shall be pre - drilled to mount an air regulator assembly for the pneumatic nozzle and to accept airlines that pass through airtight seals mounted to riser pipe. A slider bar and associated hardware shall be provided with riser clamp assembly. Sizes of the riser clamp will range from 3" - 6 " diameter to match the output velocity of the vehicles that will park in that station. I Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -9 G. Accutrack Trolley/ Balancer Assembly: The trolley assembly shall be manufactured as a two piece galvanized steel assembly including bumper stops at each end. Fixed to the side of the trolley are solid steel pins, which shall be for load carrying bearings that are sealed and permanently lubricated. The Load carrying bearings shall travel internally in track trolley channel. Two additional permanently lubricated trolley wheels shall be provided on bottom side of the track to reduce wobble of trolley as it conveys the hose assembly to the door threshold. A release plate shall be attached to the chassis of the trolley to smoothly energize the uncoupling release valve when the trolley- balancer assembly approaches the door threshold. The system balancer assembly shall be a self- adjusting weight spring tension balancer with a lifting capacity of no less than 31 Lb. The balancer shall have a minimum diameter stainless steel cable of .080 and a safety link connection. The system supplier shall manufacture the balancer and trolley for the sole purpose of conveying the flexible hose to the door threshold for automatic release of the system. Only a stainless steel balancer cable will be accepted. No exceptions. H. Regulator Assembly: The regulator assembly shall be constructed of cast aluminum and refinished with black epoxy coating for durability. The regulator shall safely operate with an in- put pressure of 0 - 200 psi; the output pressure shall be preset at 15 psi. The re- gulator shall be attached to each Riser Clamp Assembly /Hose Drop or to the boxloc track to allow for independent adjustment of each pneumatic nozzle. The regulator shall also be provided with needle type adjustment gauge that is clearly marked with the proper operating range of system, and which can be visibly read from standing on the bay floor. Uncoupling Valve Assembly: Shall be provided to activate the release of the pneumatic nozzle connection located on vehicleis exhaust pipe. The valve shall be single direction action and affixed to a mounting bracket, which can be easily positioned and adjusted along the full length of the extruded aluminum track profile. The mounting bracket shall be formed from a minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel and designed to Pit snugly over the top of the boxloc track system. A 1/2 " opening shall be cente- red to the top side of bracket to accommodate a 1 " x 1 /2 " bolt with a 1 /2 " plated 1 1/2 " long bar providing the secure attachment of Uncoupling Valve when system is put into service. The release valve shall be set for the maximum exiting speed of the vehicle. UUppgr Flexible Hose: Hose shall be flexible exhaust hose manufactured for the sole purpose of venting high temperature exhaust gases, which are produced by internal combustion engines. The flexible hose shall be designed strictly for the harsh environment of rapid response and auto - release of a vehicle exhaust tailpipe. Hose shall range from 3" - 5" diameters with varying lengths depending on the system length required ranging from 20 - 43 feet without joining or splicing connections. Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -10 f� 1 Hose material shall be high temperature synthetic rubber impregnated into a high temperature laminated fabric with a minimum overlapping thickness of 2 7/16 ". This construction of hose must be capable of operating at continuous temperatu- res of 400 degrees F and intermittent temperatures of 500 degrees F such as are experienced when pump checks are performed inside the station. Independent testing by a recognized UL laboratory must accompany this bid as proof of performance claim. Wire Helix shall be bound and protected in laminations of hose winding. This shall be accomplished in a fashion, which eliminates any possibility of personnel coming in contact with an exposed hot metal helix. The hose shall further protect the internal wire helix from heat buildup and in turn add increased visibility to personnel. Wear strip shall be 9/16" wide and be provided as a safety yellow color. The bend radius of the high temperature hose ' shall be no lesser then 1.5 times the diameter of hose to insure that hot gases be restricted as they pass through the system. K. Lower Hose Assembly: Shall be a rigid 3"-5" diameter by 2 foot long section of yellow and black hose identical in appearance to the upper hose assembly. Lower hose shall support the pneumatic connection nozzle and chrome reducing elbow in a rigid fashion as to allow for the operator to place hose collection nozzle onto the tailpipe without ' bending over. Lower hose is the only section of hose which shall disconnect from the upper hose assembly and act as a safety disconnect in the unlikely event the nozzle gets entangled. L. Safety Disconnect Coupling_ A rubber coupling shall be incorporated in the design of the system enabling the ' lower two foot hose assembly to separate from the upper hose assembly thus reducing the possible chance of damage to system, in the unlikely event the exhaust connection nozzle assembly may become entangled. This device shall ' consist of two spun aluminum collars connected by a reusable rubber band. The release tension of this device shall separate the two at no greater than 88 Lb. This is considered a safety requirement and any system bid must incorporate a safety disconnect. No Exceptions. M. Collection Nozzle Assembly: The nozzle shall provide an substantially air tight seal around exhaust tail pipe when connected thus allowing for 100% source capture. The seal shall not allow for escape of life threatening exhaust gases, which may be present during the ' following conditions. If vehicle's engine is accelerated above normal idle resulting in an exhaust velocity greater than 5000 feet per minute or in the event that the output velocity or CFM of the exhaust exceeds the manufacturers normal capture ' velocity or CFM of exhaust system. The Nozzle shall automatically adjust its internal orifice to accept any tail pipe ranging from one inch through six -inch diameter. The bidder of the nozzle shall offer, if required, both maximum diame- ter nozzles ranging from 4.75" diameter to 8.25" diameter. The nozzle pressure shall not exceed 15 psi. when connected to the vehicleis tailpipe. Nozzle construction shall be high temperature synthetic rubber, vulcanized to a high Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -11 i1 temperature synthetic fabric. A NOMEX inner liner shall be provided for the primary temperature source at the tailpipe and also act as a friction barrier. The chrome- reducing elbow that connects to the connection nozzle shall be fabricated using continuous welded construction. This important feature eliminates the escape of any potentially lethal exhaust gases and must provide for a smooth air flow transition from connection nozzle into the high temperature flexible hose. The angle of transition shall be no less than or greater than 67 degrees from the center line of reducer. The chrome - reducer shall incorporate a primary expanded metal debris screen, which is permanently affixed by welded seams to the inside opening of exhaust fitting. Since this item is a point of safety for both personnel and the system itself, no exception will be tolerated for this point. N. Manual Fill Valve: A manual Connection fill valve shall be located one foot above safety release coupling approximately 4 feet from floor and shall be of a sliding /push button design type for manual or automatic release. This valve shall incorporate in its a handle, which the operator may easily operate in a standing position. The attachment of collection nozzle shall not position the operator's breathing zone closer than 44" from the exhaust tail pipe. The Automatic release of the connection valve shall be no greater than 3 psi. shift pressure to activate the automatic nozzle deflation. The primary air supply shall be accomplished by means of compression type fitting. The regulated air supply line to collection nozzle shall be designed to safety release from the upper hose at pressure no greater than 80 lbs. Since this is a safety item no exception will be tolerated. O. Compressed Air Features: Airlines shall be 1/4" (6mm) OD tubing capable of exposure of high tempera- ture air stream inside the ventilation hose and duct. The airlines shall be fed through the exterior of the hose and ductwork by the use of substantially air tight chrome fittings. Unless afire station air compressor is to be utilized the bidder shall provide a quiet operating compressor to be located accessible to the vehicle bays. It shall also located so that preventative maintenance can be performed quickly and effectively. The operation of compressor running inside station shall not generate sound decibels in excess of 25 Dba. The compressor shall be equipped with a filter /dryer to insure the conveyance of clean dry air to the pneumatic controls incorporated in the auto - release ventilation system. P. Hose Saddle: A hose suspension saddle shall be fabricated of a rubber molded cushion specifically manufactured for the sole purpose of suspending high temperature exhaust ventilation hose in a rapid response and auto - release application. The design of the saddle shall smoothly transition the direction of the hose during its travel along the track. Securing clamps shall be provided including a link faste- ner, for the purpose of mounting it to the balancer safety link. Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -12 i� P-, I Q. Special Features: The system must be designed to expand for future apparatus to a tandem vehicle arrangement (one vehicle behind the other) by adding to the proposed system. Systems that require replacement of the existing system or components to meet a tandem vehicle arrangement shall not be accepted. A special emergency disconnect feature shall be provided to enable the vehicle to back off the system through a rear exit door. Unique occasions may require the emergency vehicle to depart from the back door in a drive through station. Also a malfunction of the front over -head door may force the vehicle to exit from the station outside the confines of normal operation. Overall system design and performance shall be for both back in and drive- through configurations when applicable, this assures door to door coverage and collection of dangerous exhaust gases from the point of connection at the doorway. R. Vehicle Tailpipe Modification: The bidder shall supply a drawing for the precise modification procedure for the vehicles to attach to the exhaust removal system. The modification shall vent the exhaust gases at a 90- degree angle on the passenger side of vehicle. Tailpipe modifications requiring a 45- degree angle of exhaust venting shall not be accep- table, so to prevent exhaust blow back into station after the auto - release system disengages from the tailpipe. A flange shall be provided and installed by the bidder as a precisely located stopping point for the collection nozzle. The manu- facturers supplied adapter shall securely attach to the vehicle tailpipe. The flange shall be fabricated from 14 gauge - aluminized steel. Two sections (or) half s shall be provided for simple attachment to vehicleis tailpipe. The sections shall be bolted together with four (4) 3/4" x 1- 1 /2" long bolts and nuts. 3. TRAINING: 3.03 TRAINING: The bidder or authorized approved personnel, shall provide training to fire department personnel in the daily use and maintenance of the vehicle exhaust removal system that has been installed and specified herein. The fire department shall be notified at least 7 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course. Training shall be for all personnel involved with the operation of the exhaust removal system to include all shifts required to man the particular facility. The Training session, shall be performed in person by a recognized represen- tative of the manufacturer of the exhaust removal system, in addition a training video shall be provided to the fire department. I Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 238400 -13 P1 SECTION 260010 -- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further for instructions and be governed by the requirements contained there under. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of those details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems. B. Work Not Included Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other sections of these specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner; when this is the case, the extent, source, and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specification. 1.3 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, the electrical drawings, and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, technology and specialty systems drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the electrical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the electrical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the electrical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the same. Coordinate electrical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent fords any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and I ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-1 specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. In acceptance or rejection of installed electrical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.4 A The latest editions of the following standards (including supplements and official interpretations) are minimum requirements: T. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code. 3. NFPA 101— Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA 110 — Emergency Power Systems 5. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 7. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 8. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). 11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 12. International Building Code. 13. International Mechanical Code. 14. International Fire Code. 15. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. The complete installation shall comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service to this installation. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the drawings and specifications. 1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install ". "Furnish" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. "Install" means to join, unit, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. The words "accept" or "acceptable" denote only that the equipment items are in general conformance with the design concept of the project. B. Drawings: The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic, however, re- circuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications are complementary to each other. What is called for by one shall be as ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS CODES AND STANDARDS G' �I El ri 0 1q 260010-2 1 �I I 1 binding as if called for by both. Data presented on these drawings is accurate as planning can be determined, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the Architect is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the Architect. 1.6 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Engineer for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. Failure to request clarification during the bid period of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities. The signing of the contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of the full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.7 PERMITS, FEES & NOTICES A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and certificates that may be necessary for the full completion of the work. Furnish the Architect with a certificate of final inspection and approval from the AHJ over the electrical installation. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.8 TESTS A. Upon completion of all work and adjustment of all equipment, provide complete operational tests of all electrical equipment provided under this division. I ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-3 7 1.9 WARRANTY A. Guarantee that all work governed by this division shall be free of defects in workmanship, materials and parts for a period of one (1) year after written acceptance. Promptly repair, revise, and replace defects as directed with no additional cost to the Owner (lamps and fuses are exempt). 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a current set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Architect at all times. These updated progress drawings shall be used to produce the final record drawings that shall be in AutoCad electronic format media upon project completion. B. Upon completion of the contract, both sets (electronic and hard copy drawings) of record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. C. The Contractor shall mark all record drawings on the front lower right hand comer with a stamp impression that reads `RECORD DRAWINGS' or similar. 1.11 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs. C. Coordinate the work with that of all other trades. Where conflicts of work occur and departure from the indicated arrangements are necessary, consult with other Contractors involved; come to agreement as to changed locations and elevations, etc., and obtain written acceptance from the Architect of proposed changes before proceeding with work. D. All outages of electrical service shall be scheduled with the Owner and Utility Company five (5) days in advance of proposed outage. Include an overtime allowance in the bid for the performance of all work requiring outages at such time as it is approved by the Owner. Outages shall be at a time and of such duration as accepted by the Owner. 1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.13 USE OF THE ARCHITECT'S AND /OR ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCAD or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and/or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-4 s 1 1 s 7 shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the Architect and Engineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 STANDARD FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. 2.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provision of Division 1. B. Listing of Equipment: The Contractor shall submit, within thirty days after the award of the contract, a complete typewritten list of those items of equipment which will be furnished under this contract. Include the name or description of the item, name of manufacturer, model, type, and catalog number. C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three -ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Do not begin work until (1) copy is returned. D. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings, layouts, manufacturer's data, wiring diagrams and material schedules that may be requested by the Architect for his review. The review by the Architect will not constitute concurrence with any deviation from the plans and specifications unless such deviations are specifically identified by the method described below, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted data. E. Processed shop drawings shall not be construed as change orders. The shop drawings shall demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept, indicate which equipment and materials he intends to provide, and detail the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the design drawings and specifications are discovered, the design drawings and specifications shall govern. F. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them and sign a statement on the shop drawings which signifies that they comply with plans and specifications and that equipment is dimensionally suitable for the application. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the I ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-5 7 submittal. The Owner's copies (two of each) of the reviewed submittals shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the project and presented in bound form to the Owner. G. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4" scale layout drawings of room with switchboards, transformers, telephone backboards, panelboards, and data equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with mechanical equipment. Equipment shall be drawn to scale. 2.3 A. 2.4 Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. Alternate(s) for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND /OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified generically (no manufacturer's name listed), no prior review by the Consulting Electrical Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions for Material 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such substitutions shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by a full description of the difference between the Contract Document requirements and that of the substitution, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end result performance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to the other trades. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS BID ALTERNATE(S) J i H1 d u 260010-6 1 1 items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions will Y q p P ' not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION A. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved. ' B. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the building. D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by ' the Architect/Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where detail or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be t followed. E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly ' checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition. ' F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes. 1 3.2 PROGRESS OF WORK A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill -timed work performed under this Section shall be borne by this Contractor. 3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in accordance with the excavating and grading specifications as herein specified. This work shall comply with the requirements of Table 300 -5 of the National Electrical Code. B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The trench bottom shall be graded true and free from stones or soft spots. Trenches through specially treated or surfaced areas, such as paving or blacktop, shall have the width of the surface cutting extended for a width of eight inches (8 ") on each side of the open trench. Unless otherwise noted, the disturbed surfaces shall be replaced equal to the original construction, to the original grade with ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-7 the same type of material, and to the same depths and limits as the materials removed. After acceptance by the Architect, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the possibility of differential settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair. 3.4 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as accepted by the Architect. B. All openings made in fire -rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated. C. All penetrations required through existing concrete construction shall be core drilled at minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to structural concrete. Contractor shall obtain permission from the Architect before proceeding with drilling. D. Provide all cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching and refinishing or resurfacing required for electrical work in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Arrange and be held responsible for delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment for electrical installation. B. Store materials and equipment for easy inspection and checking. C. Carefully mark and store all materials. D. Deliver materials to the job site in stages of the work that will expedite the work as a whole. E. Carefully check materials furnished to this Contractor for installation, and provide receipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery and condition of the materials received. Thereafter, assume full responsibility for its safekeeping until the final installation has been reviewed and accepted. 3.6 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-8 1 fl I J B. Close all conduit openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Any equipment or conduit systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. 3.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment. B. Operating manual, parts lists, and indoctrination of operating and maintenance personnel: ' Fumish the services of a qualified representative of the supplier for each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. ' C. Instruction shall be made when the particular system is complete and shall be of the number of hours indicated and at the time requested by the Owner. A representative of the Electrical Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations. 1 SYSTEM HRS. OF INSTRUCTION 1. Fire alarms stem 2 2. Sounds stem and intercoms stem 2 3. Lighting controls stems 4 4. volts ) Electrical distribution equipment (under 600 including motor control centers 2 5. Cable TVs stem 2 6. Engine generator 4 7. Special alarms stems 4 8. Data system 4 D. Deliver three (3) complete operating manuals and parts lists to the Owner (or his designated I representative) at the time of the above required indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. The operating manual and parts lists shall give complete information as to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts, including the address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within twenty four (24) hours after requested. E. Clean up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation and leave the ' premises and all equipment, lamps, fixtures, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean up of the site will be charged against the Contractor. ' F. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Architect, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided under this contract. ' ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-9 G. Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the performance of tests as specified. Submit three (3) copies of a typewritten test report for the Architect for his approval. Record the full load current in each phase or line at the main service entrance and for each feeder leaving the main distribution panelboard. Readings shall be taken with the maximum installed load connected and in operation. Perform a careful inspection of the main switchboard bus structure and cable connections to verify that all connections are mechanically and electrically tight. Measure the resistance to ground for the service ground, which shall not exceed ten (10) ohms under normal soil moisture conditions. If required, install additional ground provisions in a manner accepted by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.8 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR ROOFS A. Raceways penetrating roofs shall be installed in a manner to preserve the integrity of the roof. Provide flashing and counter flashing for all roof penetrations required for the work. B. Conduits routed above roofs shall be installed a minimum of twelve inches (12 ") above the finished roof surface, supported on metal stands installed with flashing and counter flashing, with maximum spacing of ten feet (10' -0 "). C. Provide weatherproof duplex receptacles on roof so that no equipment installed on the roof is more than twenty -five feet (25' -0 ") from a receptacle. Connect to nearest receptacle circuit unless indicated on plans. 3.9 CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND POWER A. Provide all temporary facilities required to supply construction power and light. Install and maintain facilities in a manner that will protect the public and workmen. Comply with all applicable laws and regulations. B. Provide covered walkway lights and obstruction lights which shall be kept burning continuously between sunset and sunrise where required. C. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary facilities from the site. D. The General Contractor shall pay for all power and light used by him and his subcontractors where construction power is separately metered, or is taken from the permanent project metered service solely for construction use. E. The cutoff date for power cost allocation where permanent meters are used shall be either the agreed date of occupancy by the Owner or the date of final acceptance of the project, whichever shall be the earlier date. 3.10 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Furnish, set in place, and wire, except as indicated, all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing, fire protection, motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-10 0 Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these specifications. MD= Mechanical, Division 15. ED= Electrical, Division 16. 7. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, then wiring and connections only by ED. 8. If float switches, line thermostats, p.e. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, the Mechanical Division shall furnish them. They shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except there where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying FULL LOAD CURRENT furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. ' a. Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. ' ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-11 SET IN PLACE WIRED FURNISHED OR MTD. CONNECTED ITEM UNDER UNDER UNDER 1. Equipment motors and thermal overload, resistance MD MD ED heaters. 3 2. Motor controllers, magnetic starters, reduced voltage MD ED(a) ED starters and overload relays. 3. Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, h.p. rated switches, thermal overload ED(a) ED(a) ED switches and fuses, manual operating switches. 4. Pushbutton stations, pilot lights, multi -speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, MD MD(b) MD(b) control transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. 5. Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for boiler controls and ED ED ED for fire protection controls and smoke detectors. 6. Duct Detectors, Fire /Smoke Dampers, and MD MD ED(c) Elevator Vent Dampers. MD= Mechanical, Division 15. ED= Electrical, Division 16. 7. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, then wiring and connections only by ED. 8. If float switches, line thermostats, p.e. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, the Mechanical Division shall furnish them. They shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except there where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying FULL LOAD CURRENT furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. ' a. Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. ' ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-11 9. The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. Provide electrical connections to mechanical equipment. Refer to the Mechanical specifications and plans covering sprinkler systems, motor interlocks, switching, etc. Provide wiring, conduit, outlets and final electrical connections to all equipment. C. Where motor controllers are furnished by others, install controller and provide connections at line and load side of controllers. D. Where reduced voltage, multiple speed, duplex, triplex, lead -lag, pony motor and other unusual controller types are utilized, coordinate specific requirements of motor(s) and controller and provide required wiring between motor(s) and controller. E. For electric water coolers verify whether the equipment is hard wired, cord and plug connected and whether a remote chiller is provided. Provide circuiting and connections to match. 3.11 OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT A. Provide electrical connections to owner furnished equipment. B. Inspect owner furnished equipment for damage, defects, missing components, etc. Report deficiencies to the Owner immediately. Do not install or connect deficient equipment. C. Provide supports, fastenings, and auxiliary hardware necessary for a complete installation in accordance with the finished building conditions. END OF SECTION 16010 1 r ill ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-12 1 `i SECTION 260519 - LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene- propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN -THWN and XHHW. C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal -clad cable, Type MC with ground wire. LOW - VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND 260519-1 CABLES �1, 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory- fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal -clad cable, Type MC. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on- Grade, and Underground: Type THHN- THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal -clad cable, Type MC. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on- Grade, and Underground: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway. H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless - steel, wire -mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer- approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND 260519-2 CABLES C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire /cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." F. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire - resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 260519 LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND 260519-3 ' CABLES SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned - copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. ' C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32 -inch holes spaced 1 -1/8 inches apart. Stand -off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-1 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic- welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. D. Bus -bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire terminals, and long - barrel, two -bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. 2. Duct -Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of duct -bank installation. C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2 1 i i 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single -phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three -phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Metal -clad cable runs. C. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct - mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat - Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat - tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J- STD- 607 -A. 1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1 /4- by- 4 -by -12 -inch grounding bus. 3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. F. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch- circuit conductors. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below fmished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one -rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-3 C Q E. 3.4 A. except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug -type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. Ufer Ground (Concrete- Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation. 2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete. LABELING Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 0 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-4 1 J B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground- resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall -of- potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each ground rod and ground -rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 2. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s). F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-5 1 SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/DI.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-1 r' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA -4, factory- fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4. 2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. D. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2 -inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface - Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS i �l H 260529-2 transformers, and other devices on slotted - channel racks attached to substrate. 3.3 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field - painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing - repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-3 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. EPDM: Ethylene- propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber. E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. PVC - Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-1 C. EMT: ANSI C80.3. D. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. E. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die -cast, set -screw or compression type. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC - Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40 -PVC, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. C. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. 2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. Color of Frame and Cover: Green. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper- resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit - terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling -in irons installed before concrete is poured. B. Polymer- Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer- Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer- Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet - molded, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2 ' fiberglass- reinforced, polyester -resin enclosure joined to polymer- concrete top ring or frame. D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass - reinforced polyester resin, with covers of polymer concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION I RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: ' 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. 4. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC -40 -PVC, direct buried. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC . 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 1 6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring: a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off - Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer ' concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating. b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety ' Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Heavy -duty fiberglass units with polymer- concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating. C. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass- reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 ' with 3000 -1bf vertical loading. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: ' 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT . 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. ' 4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations. ' C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 -inch trade size. ' D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer. I RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 L , 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot -water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. F D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. G. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. H. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -1b tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. J. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4 -Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1 -Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90- degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. K. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. L. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-4 I M. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. N. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct -Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section 'Barth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section 'Barth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie -in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct -buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2 -inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire- resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." I RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-5 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-6 SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: - 1. Identification for conductors. 2. Underground -line warning tape. 3. Equipment identification labels. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive - attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-1 LI PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS I A. Color- Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self - adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. 2.3 UNDERGROUND -LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended'by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red - Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,. 3. Inscriptions for Orange- Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE,. 2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV- resistant seal for label. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-2 7 I i C i D. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. E. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground -line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Power- Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color - coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color- Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service and feeder conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120 -V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. C. Field- Applied, Color- Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half - lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. I a I � 1 Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground -line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground -line warning tape to direct -buried cables. 2. Install underground -line warning tape for both direct - buried cables and cables in raceway. C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay . Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2 -inch- high letters on 1- 1/2 -inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-3 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self - adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. C. Enclosed switches. d. Enclosed circuit breakers. e. Push -button stations. f. Power transfer equipment. END OF SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-4 1 SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Time switches. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Indoor occupancy sensors. 4. Lighting contactors. 5. Emergency shunt relays. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Lightolier Controls. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 6. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 7. Sensor Switch, Inc. 8. Watt Stopper. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923-1 C 2.2 A. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling - mounted, solid -state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 30 minutes. 3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack. 4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20 -A ballast load at 120- and 277 -V ac, for 13 -A tungsten at 120 -V ac, and for 1 hp at 120 -V ac. Sensor has 24 -V dc, 150 -mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 5. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2 -inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. C. Time -Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 6. � Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. 7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. SWITCHBOX - MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Lightolier Controls. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 6. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 7. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 8. Sensor Switch, Inc. 9. Watt Stopper. B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic -wall- switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800 -VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200 -VA fluorescent at 277 V, and 800 -W incandescent. C t ' LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923-2 1 LI � I 2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Allen- Bradley /Rockwell Automation. 2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. 3. Eaton Corporation. 4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total Lighting Control. 5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination -type lighting contactors with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high - inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation. 3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure. 2.4 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Lighting Control and Design; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 2. Watt Stopper. B. Description: Normally closed, electrically held" relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924. 1. Coil Rating: 120 V. 2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote - Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 ' AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded- copper conductors not smaller than No. 24 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." ' C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded- copper conductors not smaller thanNo. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical ' LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923-3 L� C Power Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling- mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire- suppression systems, and partition assemblies. B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure - borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory- installed vibration isolators. 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power - limited and nonpower- limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. I 4 s LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923-4 1 �I 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory- authorized service representative: 1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other - than- normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations. 2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations. 3. Align high -bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low- voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls." B. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. END OF SECTION 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923-5 SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch - circuit panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B.. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. ' 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short- circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. ' 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. ' C. Field Quality - Control Reports: I . Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. ' PANELBOARDS 262416-1 LI D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in P anelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time - current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: PANELBOARDS 262416-2 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor - bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface - mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. C. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 3. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim. 4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Tin- plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch- circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Tin- plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. I PANELBOARDS 262416-3 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical g 8 type. 4. Feed - Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. E. Panelboard Short- Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series - connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series - connected short- circuit rating by an NRTL. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. D. Mains: Circuit breaker. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit - Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Plug -in circuit breakers. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit - Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug -in circuit breakers where individual positive - locking device requires mechanical release for removal. G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches. 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH- CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch - circuit type. PANELBOARDS 262416-4 1 F1 C. Mains: lugs only. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug -in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series - connected rating to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal- Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time - current element for low -level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit - breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault protection (6 -mA trip). 3. Ground -Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground -fault protection (30 -mA trip). 4. Molded -Case Circuit - Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high- intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Shunt Trip: 120 -V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. 2.5 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Liebert Corporation. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. I PANELBOARDS 262416-5 J 0 5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41- compliant, integrally mounted, solid - state, parallel - connected, non - modular type, with sine -wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short- circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short- circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: Accessories: a. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. b. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. C. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250 -V ac, for remote monitoring of protection status. C. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41- compliant, integrally mounted, bolt -on, solid - state, parallel- connected, modular (with field - replaceable modules) type, with sine -wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short- circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short- circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: Accessories: a. Fuses rated at 200 -kA interrupting capacity. b. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. C. Redundant suppression circuits. d. Redundant replaceable modules. e. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. f. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. g. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. h. Form -C contacts rated at 5 A and 250 -V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current- limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. i. Four - digit, transient -event counter set to totalize transient surges. Peak Single - Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per mode/ 160 kA per phase. Minimum single - impulse current ratings, using 8- by- 20- mic.sec. waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2. a. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A. b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A. C. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A. 4. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8- by- 20- mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. 5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 -V, three - phase, four -wire circuits shall be as follows: a. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120. b. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120. C. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120. I H fl n H PANELBOARDS 262416-6 HI i I 2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407. B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4 -inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." ■ 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For panelboards, install epoxy- coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and ' anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, ' instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard. C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. E. Install overcurrent rotective devices and controllers not already facto installed. P Y rY ' 1. Set field - adjustable, circuit - breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. ' G. Stub four 1 -inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1 -inch empty conduits into raised floor PANELBOARDS 262416-7 C space or below slab not on ade. I P �' H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. I. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field - installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning • signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. PANELBOARDS 262416-8 �F' 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS 262416-9 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist - locking receptacles. 3. Receptacles with integral surge suppression units. 4. Isolated - ground receptacles. 5. Hospital -grade receptacles. 6. Snap switches and wall -box dimmers. 7. Solid -state fan speed controls. 8. Pendant cord - connector devices. 9. Cord and plug sets. 10. Floor service outlets, poke - through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch - circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio - frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. WIRING DEVICES 262726-1 B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. _ 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner - Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device- Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. ( Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5 -20R, and UL 498. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). C. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). e. <Insert manufacturer's name; catalog numbers.> WIRING DEVICES 262726-2 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES ' A. General Description: Straight blade, feed - through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. 2.4 PENDANT CORD - CONNECTOR DEVICES A. Description: Matching, locking -type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5 -20P and L5 -20R, heavy -duty grade. 1. Body: Nylon with screw -open cable - gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. 2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire -mesh type made of high- strength galvanized -steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector. 2.5 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 1. Cord: Rubber - insulated, stranded- copper conductors, with Type SOW -A jacket; with green - insulated grounding conductor and equipment - rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable - clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.6 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). C. Leviton; 1221 -2 (single pole), 1222 -2 (two pole), 1223 -2 (three way), 1224 -2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC 1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way). I WIRING DEVICES 262726-3 L 2.7 FAN SPEED CONTROLS A. Modular, 120 -V, full -wave, solid -state units with integral, quiet on -off switches and audible frequency and EMURFI filters. Comply with UL 1917. 1. Continuously adjustable slider, 5 A. 2. Three -speed adjustable slider, 1.5 A. 2.8 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate- Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high - impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. B. Wet- Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather- resistant, die -cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2.9 SERVICE POLES A. Description: Factory- assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor. 1. Poles: Nominal 2.5 -inch- square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6 inches above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice and data communication cabling. 2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment. 3. Finishes: Satin - anodized aluminum. 4. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a minimum of four, 4 -pair, Category 3 or 5 voice and data communication cables. 5. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20 -A, heavy -duty, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5 -20R units. 6. Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Two RJ -45 Category 5e jacks. 2.10 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. C WIRING DEVICES 262726-4 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 INSTALLATION I A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and ' cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid ' scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. D. Device Installation: Ll I 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20 -A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. WIRING DEVICES 262726-5 F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. END OF SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262726-6 SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded -case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Enclosures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short - circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-1 and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240 -V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with plug fuse interiors to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to' accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-2 1 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 2.3 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler - Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. C. Thermal- Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time - current element for low -level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit - breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. D. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. I ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-3 f J C. Source quality - control test reports. 1. Certified summary of prototype -unit test report. D. Field quality- control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with ASME B 15.1. F. Comply with NFPA 37. G. Comply with NFPA 70. H. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system. I. Comply with UL 2200. J. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements. K. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling -air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. ENGINE GENERATORS 263213-2 1 h 1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Engine- generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 8150 feet. fW=Ki1 R J 1Z : ROW A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include ' routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: ' 1. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 2. Generac Power Systems, Inc. 3. Kohler Co.; Generator Division. 4. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. 1 ENGINE GENERATORS 263213-3 I F 2. 2 ENGINE- GENERATOR SET A. Factory- assembled and - tested, engine - generator set. B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments. 1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator -set center of gravity. C. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing. 2. Output Connections: Three- phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component. D. Generator -Set Performance: 1. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements. 2.3 ENGINE A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF -2 . B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm. for Four Engines: 2250 fpm. C. Maximum Piston Speed -Cycle D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow. 2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail -safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances. E. Engine Fuel System: 1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. 2. Relief -Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source. F. Governor: Mechanical. G. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine- ENGINE GENERATORS 263213-4 generator -set mounting frame and integral engine -driven coolant pump. P C C I 1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene- glycol -based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 3. Temperature Control: Self - contained, thermostatic- control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. 4. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging -, ultraviolet -, and abrasion - resistant fabric. a. Rating: 50 -psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and noncollapsible under vacuum. b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections. H. Muffler /Silencer: Industrial type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. Minimum sound attenuation of 12 dB at 500 Hz. Sound level measured at a distance of 25 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is complete shall be 87 dBA or less. Air- Intake Filter: Standard -duty, engine - mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry- filter element and "blocked filter" indicator. Starting System: 12 -V electric, with negative ground. 1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine - cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. 2. Cranking Motor: Heavy -duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding. 3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within.ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery- Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid -state voltage regulation and 35 -A minimum continuous rating. 7. Battery Charger: Current - limiting, automatic- equalizing and float - charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing - charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float - charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. ENGINE GENERATORS 263213-5 n 0 C. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates. e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or do output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery- charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall - mounted cabinet. 2.4 A. 2.5 Comply with NFPA 30. Base - Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank. Features include the following: 1. Tank level indicator. 2. Capacity: Fuel for eight hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output. 3. Vandal- resistant fill cap. 4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. CONTROL AND MONITORING A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode - selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote - control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode - selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator -set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency -stop switch also shuts down generator set. B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator -set vibration. C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 2 system, and the following: 1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine - coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating -oil pressure gage. 7. Running -time meter. 8. Ammeter- voltmeter, phase - selector switch(es). 9. Generator - voltage adjusting rheostat. ENGINE GENERATORS FUEL OIL STORAGE I F_ L' 263213-6 1 I 1 10. Fuel tank high -level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated. E. Remote Emergency -Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation. 2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded -case, thermal- magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. 1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. 2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1. B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor. C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F. D. Stator- Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. F. Enclosure: Dripproof. G. Voltage Regulator: Solid -state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. 1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output - voltage operating band. 2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open -spring isolators with seismic restraint. ' 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory: drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4 -inch- thick, 1 ENGINE GENERATORS 263213-7 r� elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.9 FINISHES A. 2.10 Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion - resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine - generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115. B. Project- Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine - generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. 2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady -state governing. 6. Single -step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by Owner's representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine - generator performance. B. Examine roughing -in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine - generator installation. ENGINE GENERATORS 263213-8 k I' L -1 k-' r H I I C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with packaged engine - generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110. B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance. ' C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch on 4- inch - high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Install remote radiator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch on [concrete base on grade] [roof equipment supports on roof]. E. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." 1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a ' shutoff valve, stainless -steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." ' F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. B. Connect fuel, cooling- system, and exhaust- system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator ' to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector. i D. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector. ' E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors ' and Cables." ' ENGINE GENERATORS 263213-9 7 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5 A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single -step full -load pickup test. 3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages. a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full- charging and float - charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. C. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. 4. Battery- Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float - charging conditions. 5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine - generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. D. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. E. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request. F. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. ENGINE GENERATORS 263213-10 D L P G. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. H. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. I. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and reinspect as specified above. J. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. K. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 263213 263213-11 SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality - control test reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay - setting and calibration instructions, including software, where applicable. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification. B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600-1 D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. F. Comply with NFPA 110. G. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Contactor Transfer Switches: a. Caterpillar; Engine Div. b. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. C. Generac Power Systems, Inc. d. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division. e. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER- SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated. B. Tested Fault - Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008. C. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. B. Switching Arrangement: Double -throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated. C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. D. Automatic Transfer - Switch Features: TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600-2 1 1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase -to- ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent. 2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal- source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second. 3. Switch - Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 4. Source- Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer- switch normal- and emergency - source sensing circuits. a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available." b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available." 5. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single -pole, double -throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240 -V ac. 6. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine- generator . controls after retransfer of load to normal source. BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. ' 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time -delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1. I PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 A. B. t A. 1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase -to- ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent. 2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal- source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second. 3. Switch - Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 4. Source- Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer- switch normal- and emergency - source sensing circuits. a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available." b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available." 5. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single -pole, double -throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240 -V ac. 6. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine- generator . controls after retransfer of load to normal source. BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. ' 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time -delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1. I PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 A. B. 3.2 INSTALLATION Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Set field- adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, ' test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600-3 [ i B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. P P P 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing. 2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment. END OF SECTION 263600 L TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600-4 1 t t SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Exit signs. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall -box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CCT: Correlated color temperature. C. CRI: Color- rendering index. D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF. ' INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-1 l l 4. Ener - efficienc data. 1 gY Y 5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy - efficiency data for lamps. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. F. Factory- Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T -4, T -5, T -8, T -12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-2 1 LJ C. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED 17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi -level control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. B. luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed -start ballasts. C. Electronic Programmed -Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. D. Ballasts for Low - Temperature Environments: 1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types. 2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types. 2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Description: Electronic- programmed rapid -start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi -level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. I INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-3 2.5 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other - than- normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark. 1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect. END OF SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-4 SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Poles and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color- rendering index. C. HID: High - intensity discharge. D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. F. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination. G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above. 1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS -4 -M. B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS -4 -M. C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf /sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS -4 -M Ice Load Map. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-1 D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS -4 -M. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Luminaire materials. 4. Ballasts, including energy - efficiency data. 5. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy - efficiency data. 6. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 7. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. 8. Anchor bolts for poles. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Retain factory- applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-2 Ll locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP -8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion - resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light -tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or ' deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. t EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-3 G. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. H. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. I. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging - resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. J. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory- assembled and - tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. K. Factory- Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. ' Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. ' b. Lamp diameter code (T -4, T -5, T -8, T -12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. C. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED 17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for ' HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact ' fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. t EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-3 2.3 A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open - circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant - wattage autotransformer or regulating high - power - factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 2.4 HID LAMPS A. 2.5 Metal- Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS -4 -M. 1. Wind -Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article. 2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of 'luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis. B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless -steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated. C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion - resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. 3. Anchor -Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. D. Handhole: Oval- shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2 -1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured by stainless -steel captive screws. E. Power - Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top -plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. EXTERIOR LIGHTING BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS 7 d- h D 0 H D h H_ 265600-4 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. END OF SECTION 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-5 SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems. 2. Division 28 Section "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270528-1 SYSTEMS 1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. ": 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. ": 2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. ": B. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2 -1/8 inches deep. C. Gangable boxes are allowed. 2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND CABLING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA- 569 -B. B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass- reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of polymer concrete. a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. C. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems. d. NewBasis. e. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. f. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products. g. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray. 4. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270528-2 SYSTEMS 5. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper- resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 6. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 7. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS. ". 8. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit - terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 9. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling -in irons installed before concrete is poured. 2 .5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES A. Handhole and Pull -Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC . 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 -PVC , direct buried. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. ' 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC . Pathway locations include the following: a. Apparatus Bays. b. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT . 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC . 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Type 4 stainless ' steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270528-3 SYSTEMS G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished .walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10 -foot intervals. 2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS J 270528-4 C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4 -inch trade size. Minimum size for optical -fiber cables is 1 inch. D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings. G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA -569 -B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot -water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90- degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical -fiber cables. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished .walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10 -foot intervals. 2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS J 270528-4 7 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC -40 -PVC, GRC or IMC before rising above floor. J. Stub -ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub -ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. L. Coat field -cut threads on PVC - coated pathway with a corrosion- preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts. N. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings 1 in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2 -inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length. Q. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -1b tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use. R. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. ' S. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. T. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings. U. Expansion -Joint Fittings: PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270528-5 SYSTEMS 7 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight -run length that exceeds 25 feet Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight -run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. C. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: [ 125 deg F] <Insert temperature> temperature change. d. Attics: [ 135 deg F] <Insert temperature> temperature change. e. <Insert location and corresponding temperature change>. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. V. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Y. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. Z. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. AA. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. BB. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270528-6 SYSTEMS C I !r � C 0 fl D H-1 I 7 7 iJ i 1 1 1 1 1 A. 1 B. C INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT Direct -Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie -in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub -up ducts throughout length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct -buried conduits, but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. 7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2 -inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. C. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. ' PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528-7 E. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling." 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 270528 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270528-8 SYSTEMS SECTION 270544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non -fire -rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve -seal systems. 3. Sleeve -seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire- resistance -rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 SLEEVES A. Wall Sleeves: ' 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron ' pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non -Fire -Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized -steel sheet; 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw - fastening the sleeve to the board. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR 270544- 1 COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND ' CABLING C. PVC -Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. D. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized -steel sheet. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross - section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch b. For sleeve cross - section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 2.2 SLEEVE -SEAL SYSTEMS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. C. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion - resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.3 SLEEVE -SEAL FITTINGS A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve -type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Presealed Systems. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR 270544-2 COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 2.4 GROUT A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non -fire -rated walls or floors. I B. Standard: ASTM C 1107 /C 1107M, Grade B, post - hardening and volume - adjusting, dry, hydraulic - cement grout. E C. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealants: Single- component, silicone- based, neutral- curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self - leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON - FIRE -RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above -Grade Non -Fire -Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non - Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core - drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR 270544-3 COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND ' CABLING I with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non -Fire -Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. E. Roof - Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot -type flashing units applied in coordination with roofmg work. F. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.2 SLEEVE- SEAL - SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve -seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs -on -grade at pathway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.3 SLEEVE- SEAL - FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve -seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve -seal fittings. END OF SECTION 270544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR 270544-4 COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING t SECTION 271100 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Telecommunications mounting elements. 2. Backboards. 3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. 4. Telecommunications service entrance pathways. 5. Grounding. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 2. Division 27 Section "Audiovisual Systems." 3. Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs). C. LAN: Local area network. D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, ' and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM 271100-1 ' FITTINGS r sections details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. 3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of Commercial Installer, Level 2. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as Commercial Installer, Level 2 to perform the on -site inspection. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A. D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM 271100-2 FITTINGS r Id 1 carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of 1 equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross - connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space 1 requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. 4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross - connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room. B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A. B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets shall be designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Cable tie slots fasten cable ties to brackets. 1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire- resistant and low- smoke - producing characteristics. 2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 3. Lacing bars, spools, J- hooks, and D -rings. 4. Straps and other devices. C. Cable Trays: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cablofil Inc. b. Chatsworth Products, Inc. C. Ortronics/Legrand - Homalco. d. 2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors. . a. Ladder Cable Trays (Cable Runway): Nominally 12 inches wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches. D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" and Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. 1 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 271100-3 2.2 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: AC -Grade plywood, fire- retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2.3 EQUIPMENT FRAMES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B -Line, Inc. 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 3. Middle Atlantic Products, Inc. 4. Ortronics, Inc. B. General Frame Requirements: 1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding and wall - mounting, modular -steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. 2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard, 19 -inch panel mounting. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked- polyester powder coat. C. Floor- Mounted Racks: Modular -type, aluminum construction. 1. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug, and a power strip. 2. Baked- polyester powder coat finish. D. Modular Wall Cabinets: 1. Wall mounting. 2. Aluminum construction. 3. Treated to resist corrosion. 4. Lockable front and rear doors. 5. Louvered side panels. 6. Cable access provisions top and bottom. 7. Grounding lug. 8. Roof - mounted, 250 -cfm fan. 9. Power strip. E. Cable Management for Equipment Frames: 1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 2. Baked- polyester powder coat finish. 3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers. COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM 271100-4 FITTINGS 2.4 POWER STRIPS A. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363. 1. Rack mounting. 2. Six, 15 -A, 120 -V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5 -15R receptacles. 3. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 4. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground. 5. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost. 6. Cord connected with 15 -foot line cord. 7. Rocker -type on -off switch, illuminated when in on position. 8. Peak Single - Impulse Surge Current Rating: 26 kA per phase. 9. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. UL 1449 clamping voltage for all 3 modes shall be not more than 330 V. 2.5 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB): 1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic -type wire terminals, and long - barrel, two -bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide with 9/32 -inch holes spaced 1 -1/8 inches apart. 3. Stand -Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. C. Bonding Conductors: 1. Conductors: Insulated stranded copper, #2 /OAWG minimum, green insulation. D. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 2.6 LABELING A. Comply with TIA/EIA -606 -A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES I A. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation point, protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider. I COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 271100-5 B. Install underground pathways complying with recommendations in TIA/EIA- 569 -A, "Entrance Facilities" Article. 1. Install underground entrance pathway complying with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms. C. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA- 569 -A -7. D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A, Annex A, " Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, " Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2 -inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications rooms and spaces. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA- 606 -A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM 271100-6 FITTINGS B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire - resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Labels shall be preprinted or computer - printed type. END OF SECTION 271100 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM 271100-7 FITTINGS SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pathways. 2. UTP cabling. 3. Coaxial cable. 4. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross - connects. 5. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 6. Cabling system identification products. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice ..« and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. Cross - Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross - connection. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. E. LAN: Local area network. F. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates. G. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. H. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-1 r 1.4 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross - connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area. 2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross - connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. 3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. B. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment. The maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet in the horizontal cross - connect. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. C. Maximum pulling tension. B. Shop Drawings: Cabling administration drawings and printouts. Cross - connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. C. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-2 Ci n H H �I J 0 fl D I H 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A. E. Grounding: Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. I COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-3 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program developmentby an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as a Level 2 Installer to supervise on -site testing. ' B. Surface - Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. ' 1. Flame- Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke - Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A. E. Grounding: Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. I COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-3 i B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A. B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 2. Lacing bars, spools, J- hooks, and D -rings. 3. Straps and other devices. C. Cable Trays: _ 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cablofil Inc. b. Chatsworth Products, Inc. C. Ortronics/Legrand - Homalco 2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors. a. Ladder Cable Trays (Cable Runway): See Drawings for dimension wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches. D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems and Division 26 Section Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. 2.2 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC / TrueNet. 2. Berk -Tek; a Nexans company. 3. Uniprise / CommScope, Inc. 4. Superior Essex Inc. 5. Tyco Electronics /AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. B. Description: 100 -ohm, 4 -pair UTP, covered with a thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S -90 -661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1 for performance specifications. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-4 F-1 3. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2, Category 6. 4. Jacket Color: a. Blue: Data applications. b. White: Voice/VoIP applications. C. Red: Emergency /autodialer applications. d. Green: Dedicated analog (fax, direct outside line) applications. e. Yellow: IP -CCTV applications. f. Purple: Audiovisual applications. 5. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. 2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC /TrueNet. 2. Uniprise /CommScope, Inc. 3. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 4. Ortronics/Legrand. 5. Tyco Electronics /AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch -down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Connecting Blocks: 110 -style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. D. Cross - Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple - numbered jack units with IDC -type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four -pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria. F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color- coded, eight - position modular receptacle units with integral IDC -type terminals. G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four -pair cables in 48 -inch lengths; terminated with eight - position modular plug at each end. Patch cords shall have bend - relief - compliant boots and color -coded icons to ensure I COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-5 F Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords shall have color -coded boots for circuit identification. 2.4 COAXIAL CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 2. CommScope, Inc. 3. Superior Essex, Inc. B. Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75 -ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz. C. Series 6: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM. 1. No. 18 AWG, solid, copper- covered steel conductor; gas - injected, foam -PE insulation. 2. Quad shielded with 100 percent aluminum -foil shield, 60 percent aluminum braid, 100 percent aluminum -foil shield, and 40 percent aluminum braid. 3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE. 4. Suitable for indoor installations. D. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows: 1. CATV Cable: Type CATV. 2.5 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC /TrueNet. 2. Uniprise /CommScope, Inc. 3. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 4. Ortronics /Legrand. 5. Tyco Electronics /AMP NetConnect. B. Coaxial -Cable Connectors: Type F, 75 ohms. 2.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET /CONNECTORS A. Jacks: 100 -ohm, balanced, twisted -pair connector; four -pair, eight - position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-6 1 B. Workstation Outlets: Multi- port- connector assemblies mounted in single or multigang faceplate. 1. For use with snap -in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP and coaxial work area cords. 2. Legend: Snap -in, clear -label covers and machine- printed paper inserts. 3. Configuration: See Drawings. 2.7 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 2.8 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA -606 -A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2. D. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 3 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results. E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 2.10 MANUFACTURER'S EXTENDED WARRANTY A. Contractor shall select UTP and UTP Connectivity manufacturers to provide communications infrastructure extended warranty for parts, labor and technical support, in the following combinations: 1. ADC: TrueNet; 20 years. 2. CommScope/Uniprise; 20 years. 3. Superior Essex & Leviton Voice/Data: NextLAN; lifetime. 4. Berk -Tek & Ortronics /Legrand: NetClear; 25 years. 5. AMP: NetConnect; 25 years. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-7 B. Extended warranty shall be in effect for a period of not less than 20 years following turnover to Owner. C. Contractor shall be certified by manufacturer to provide installation complying with warranty requirements. Contractor shall be responsible for completion and turnover of any necessary documentation required to obtain warranty. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 27 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" and Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA- 569 -A -7. B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings. C. Comply with TIA/EIA -569 -A for pull -box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. D. Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" and Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways. E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long - radius elbows whenever possible. F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-8 D J 0 I I is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed ' around perimeter walls of room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inches beyond finished surface. ' 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. I G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96 -inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap -free corners and joints. ' 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. I COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-9 A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110 -style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross - connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced.. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. ' 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold - Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. ' 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10- foot - long service loop on each end of cable. ' 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: i 1. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. D. Open -Cable Installation: ' 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. I COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-9 C'. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. F. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA -569 -A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2 -1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 3.5 A. B. C. UP 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. FIRESTOPPING Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A, Annex A, " Firestopping." Comply with BICSI TDMM, " Firestopping Systems" Article. GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-10 i rl U fl 7 J k- J i a ' a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-11 Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2 -inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA- 606 -A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." ' 1. Administration Class: 1. 2. Color -code cross - connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. "Interior B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section Painting" for painting backboards. For fire - resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive ' schedules for Project. D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration -point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA- 606 -A. ' Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner. E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building- mounted devices is not required to be numbered at ' device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. ' a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-11 d building- mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. F. 3.8 A. B. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable - terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a. different color for jacks and plugs of each service. Labels shall be preprinted or computer - printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA- 606 -A. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color- coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross - connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 5. UTP Performance Tests: f] H 0 i r_1 fl a. Test for every permanent link. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1 and TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2: 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near -end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near -end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal -level far -end crosstalk (ELFEXT). COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING E H_ 271500-12 1 k r I �] 1 t 7) Power sum equal -level far -end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. 6. Coaxial Cable Tests: a. Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements. b. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items. C. Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. d. Prepare television equipment for acceptance and operational testing. e. Use an agile receiver and signal strength meter or spectrum analyzer for testing. f. Distribution System Acceptance Tests: 1) Field - Strength Instrument: Rated for minus 40 -dBmV measuring sensitivity and a frequency range of 54 to 812 MHz, minimum. Provide documentation of recent calibration against recognized standards. 2) Signal Level and Picture Quality: Use a field - strength meter or spectrum analyzer, and a standard television receiver to measure signal levels and check picture quality at all user - interface outlets. a) Test the signal strength in dBmV at 55, 151, 547, and 750 MHz. b) Minimum acceptable signal level is 0 dBmV (1000 mV). c) Maximum acceptable signal level over the entire bandwidth is 15 dBmV. d) Television receiver shall show no evidence of cross - channel intermodulation, ghost images, or beat interference. g. Signal -to- Noise -Ratio Test: Use a field - strength meter to make a sequence of measurements at the output of the last distribution amplifier or of another agreed -on location in system. With system operating at normal levels, tune meter to the picture carrier frequency of each of the designated channels in turn and record the level. With signal removed and input to corresponding headend amplifier terminated at 75 ohms, measure the level of noise at same tuning settings. With meter correction factor added to last readings, differences from first set must not be less than 45dB. 7. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTPsystems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off -hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network. C. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-13 report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. D. End -to -end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500-14 SECTION 274000 — AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Audiovisual system description. 2. Audiovisual equipment and hardware general specification. 3. Audiovisual cable specification. 4. Audiovisual installation requirements. 5. Cabling system identification requirements. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for sleeves, penetrations, and firestopping as required to support the work of this Section. 2. Division 27 Section "Communications Room Fittings" for cabinets and other infrastructure support. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Listing of Equipment: The Contractor shall submit a complete typewritten list of those items of equipment which will be furnished under this contract. The list shall contain name, description, manufacturer, and model number for all items. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components that are custom assembled for specific application on this Project. 1. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet and device locations, routing of raceways, and cables inside and outside the building. 2. Rack/Cabinet Elevations. 3. Equipment Mounting Details. 4. System Wiring Diagrams: Include system diagrams unique to Project. Show connections for all devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. D. Operation and maintenance data. E. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. 1.4 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The Contractor shall maintain record documents throughout the project, indicating `as- built' conditions. AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 274000-1 B. The Contractor shall provide a final set of record documents, in electronic format, to the Owner. The final record documents shall be included with Operation and Maintenance data to be supplied to the Owner at time of project turnover. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Audiovisual System for Training Room / Emergency Operations Center: The functionality of the Audiovisual System within this space is to include the pickup, routing, processing, and display of audio and video program material. The Audiovisual System within this space shall include the following system(s): 1. The Video System shall provide reinforcement and distribution of program source material to audience members within this space. This system shall consist of the following: a. Video Projection System: The Video Projection System shall consist of the following: 1) Permanently mounted video projector. 2) Electrically operated projection screen. 3) Video processing equipment capable of processing multiple inputs / outputs of differing formats. 4) Source equipment. 2. The Audio System shall provide reinforcement and distribution of program source material to audience members within this space. a. Sound Reinforcement System: The Sound Reinforcement System shall include: 1) In- ceiling loudspeakers, spaced evenly throughout audience area to provide uniform coverage. 2) Audio processing equipment capable of processing multiple inputs / outputs of differing signal levels. 3) Source equipment. 3. The Control System shall provide a basic control function and introduce a common level of manipulation and control of audiovisual systems within the space. Control of the AV system will be accomplished from the front of the AV equipment. a. The Contractor shall demonstrate the Control System functionality to the Owner prior to acceptance testing for evaluation. Any modifications required by the Owner shall be incorporated into the Control Sequence prior to Acceptance Testing. 4. Signals shall be routed between devices /components with cable. This system shall consist of but not be limited to: a. Coaxial cable. b. Shielded twisted pair cable. C. Unshielded twisted pair cable. d. Interface plates. e. Cable shall be installed and terminated to the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Racking System: a. Wall- mounted Equipment Cabinet: Refer to Division 27 Section "Communications Room Fittings" for requirements. b. See Drawings for configuration. B. Audiovisual System for Fitness Room: The functionality of the Audiovisual System within this space is to include the pickup, routing, processing, and display of audio AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 274000-2 II Ir J program material. The Audiovisual System within this space shall include the following t system(s): 1. The Audio System shall provide reinforcement and distribution of program source material to users of the space. This system shall include but not be limited to the following: ' a. Background Music System: The Background Music System shall consist of: 1) In- ceiling speakers. ' 2) Audio switching equipment capable of switching between line audio inputs. 3) In -room local volume control. 4) Source equipment. 2. Signals shall be routed between devices /components with cable. This system shall consist of but not be limited to: a. Shielded twisted pair cable. ' b. Interface plates. C. Cable shall be installed and terminated to the manufacturer's recommendations. ' 3. Racking System: a. Wall- mounted Equipment Cabinet: Refer to Division 27 Section "Communications Room Fittings" for requirements. ' b. See Drawings for configuration. PART 2 - MATERIALS ' A. Manufacturers: Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product as indicated on Drawings or in this Section, or comparable product. 1. The Engineer retains the right to reject products which reflect, in the Engineer's ' opinion, sub - standard design practices, manufacturing procedures, support services, or warranty policies. B. Components: 1. Television Set -Top Boxes: Furnished by Owner under television service contract with Service Provider. 2. All other components as indicated on Drawings. ' C. Part Numbers: As indicated on Drawings. 1. Part numbers listed on the Drawings are provided to define the performance specifications for the parts and shall be per the most recent manufacturer's cut/data specification sheets available at the time of bid. 2. If no part number is provided, then any part meeting the requirements or use indicated or specified is acceptable. D. Provide materials in quantities as required to provide a fully functional and operational Audiovisual System ready for Owner's use. ' 2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT A. Rack - Mounted Equipment: 1. Rack- mounted equipment shall be installed on rack - mounted shelf units. ' 2. Manufacturers: Match manufacturer of equipment racks provided, comply with Division 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." B. Structured Wiring Enclosure: ' AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS , 274000-3 1 � 1. Provide structured wiring enclosure behind television mounting bracket to house signal transmission components, outlets, and patchcords. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. Leviton Voice & Data Division. b. Ortronics. C. Channel Vision. 3. Cover: None. 4. Material: Steel, painted finish. W 2.3 WIRE AND CABLE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Belden Electronics Division. 2. General Cable. 3. Extron, Inc. B. Line Level Audio Cable: 1. Line Level / Analog Audio Cable shall be 24 AWG, stranded conductor, jacketed (color - coded), twisted pair. 2. Belden Electronics Division 1853 or approved equal. C. RGBHV (VGA) Video Cable: 1. RGBHV Video Cable shall be five - channel, 75 -ohm matched low -loss multicable within a common jacket. 2. Extron Mini 59 Superflex -5 or approved equal. D. HDMI Cable: 1. Premanufactured patch cable. 2. HDMI 1.3 Category 2 compliant. 3. 1080p and WUXGA @ 60Hz. 4. 24AWG wire within cable. 5. NEC Class 2 rated, non - plenum. 6. Maximum Length: 12ft. 7. Extron HDMI M -M Pro or approved equal. E. Speaker Level Audio Cable: 1. Speaker Level Audio Cable shall be AWG as indicated on Drawings, stranded conductor, jacketed (color - coded) unshielded multi- conductor. 2. Belden Electronics Division 5000UE series or approved equal. F. Composite / Component Video Cable: 1. Composite / Component Video Cable shall be 23 AWG, solid bare copper conductor, 95% braided shield, RG -591U -type coaxial cable. 2. (1) Cable required for Composite Video runs. 3. (3) Cables required for Component Video runs. 4. Belden Electronics Division 8241 or approved equal. 2.4 MANUFACTURER SUPPORT CONTRACT A. The Contractor shall provide any manufacturer backed maintenance, warranty and/or technical support contract necessary for the Contractor to configure, operate, service, repair and/or replace any component of the Audiovisual System. The contract shall be valid for the duration of the warranty period. The Contractor shall purchase the contract El AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 274000-4 1 I� _J t t in the Owner's name and provide documentation and renewal information to the Owner at acceptance testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except within consoles, desks, and counters. Conceal cables and raceways except in unfinished spaces. B. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, or fittings. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets. D. Separation of Wires: Separate microphone, line- level, speaker- level, and power wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate conductors at least 12 inches for microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Separate other audio /video cabling conductors as recommended by equipment manufacturer. E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips injunction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. F. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required. G. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color -code conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with system wiring diagrams. H. Carefully coordinate requirements with equipment to be furnished by Owner. 3.2 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION A. The Contractor shall provide all hardware configurations as required to provide a fully functional and operating system ready for the Owner's use. Hardware configuration shall include but not be limited to firmware configuration, data communication, system settings, power distribution and installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross - connects, and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 274000-5 G C. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. D. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. E. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. F. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. G. Cold- Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. H. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. 1. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common -mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. C. Install grounding electrodes as specified in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following and prepare test reports: 1. After installing audio /video system equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. A "Test Plan" shall be formed by the contractor. This "Test Plan" shall describe: a. Suggested tests to be conducted. b. Individual test objectives. C. Acceptable range of results. d. Corrective measures. e. Testing Schedule, including date, times and duration of testing. 3. The "Test Plan" shall incorporate tests recommended by manufacturers. 4. The "Test Plan" shall be submitted to the Owner and the Engineer for approval at least 10 working days prior to carrying out any tests. B. UTP Cable Testing 1. UTP Cable Testing shall meet the testing requirements in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling ". C. The Contractor shall provide written records of test results to the Owner within 15 days of the completion of these tests: AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 274000-6 1 it D. Operational Test: Shall include originating program material at all outputs. Observe sound and video reproduction for proper performance, free from noise, feedback, delay, and echo. E. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest. Prepare a written record of tests. F. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker -line matching transformers. G. Prepare written test reports. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements. B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 MANUALS AND DOCUMENTATION A. Each room and each system shall have one operations cheat sheet. 1. Cheat sheets shall explain in simple terms the shortest possible way to turn the system on or off, how to select playback devices, and how to operate the television and Blu -Ray player. 2. Cheat sheets shall be typewritten or drafted CAD. B. Provide three combined Operations and Maintenance Manuals, two ring- bound, one flat bound for filing with building reference documents. 1. O &M Manuals shall be of sufficient detail that a person of adequate technical ability may perform routine maintenance, recognize and replace malfunctioning equipment, and contact the proper entity for service on the faulty equipment. 2. O &M Manuals shall be typewritten, drafted CAD, or original manufacturers' documents. 3. O &M Manuals shall contain the cheat sheets, equipment serial numbers, product data submittals, test data, system description summary, functional diagrams, maintenance tasks and schedules, manufacturers' warranties, and contact information for the Contractor. C. Submit three sets of full -size record drawings to Owner. 1. The record drawings shall incorporate all field modifications and shop drawings. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain audio /video system equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." B. Provide a minimum of four hours training and education for operation, programming, starting up and shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. END OF SECTION 274000 AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 274000-7 SECTION 280513 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. Low - voltage control cabling. 3. Fire alarm wire and cable. 4. Identification products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote - control and signaling power - limited circuits. E. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: 1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. 2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. 3. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR 280513-1 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on -site testing. B. Surface - Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame- Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke - Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 5e cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR 280513-2 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 2. Lacing bars, spools, J- hooks, and D -rings. ' 3. Straps and other devices. B. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. 2.2 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product as listed in Division 27 Section Communications Horizontal Cabling. 2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 2.4 LOW- VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. 2.5 CONTROL- CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN -THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway. B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, power - limited cable, complying with UL 83, concealed in building finishes. C. Class 3 Remote - Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83. ' 2.6 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Comtran Corporation. 2. Draka Cableteq USA. ' 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inca 4. Rockbestos- Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire; a brand of Belden Inc. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR 280513-3 ' ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760. C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than size as recommended by system manufacturer. 1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification Cl, for power - limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2 -hour rating. D. Non - Power - Limited Circuits: Solid- copper conductors with 600 -V rated, 75 deg C, color -coded insulation. 1. Low - Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line - Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. HellermannTyton. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. PANDUIT CORP. B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Comply with TIA -569 -B for pull -box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." for installation of conduits and wireways. C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long - radius elbows whenever possible. D. Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 2. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. 3. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR 280513-4 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY J 3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ' A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." for installation of supports for pathways, conductors and cables. WIRING METHOD 3.3 A. Install wiring in raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. C. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross - connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's ' limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 7. Cold- Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. ' 8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5e rating of components and that ensure Category 5e performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. 1. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2. 2. Install 110 -style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. E. Separation from EMI Sources: for 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA -569 -B recommendations separating unshielded CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR 280513-5 ' ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY J copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2 -1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.5 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72. B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable. C. Wiring Method: 1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable. 2. Fire -Rated Cables: Use of 2 -hour, fire -rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and Cl, is not permitted. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power - limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits. 7 0 H__ D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips injunction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR 280513 -6 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY H_ E. Color- Coding: Color -code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color -code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color -code audible alarm- indicating circuits differently from alarm - initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm- indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red. F. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one - hour -rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones. G. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1 -inch conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function. 3.6 POWER AND CONTROL - CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. 120 -V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated. B. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote - control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low- energy, remote - control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low- energy, remote - control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. B. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Digital Addressable Fire -Alarm System " for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. 3.8 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA- 569 -13, "Firestopping" Annex A. C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.9 GROUNDING A. For communications wiring, comply with ANSI -J- STD -607 -A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. For low- voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR 280513-7 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA- 606 -A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color - coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test UTP cable as defined in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. D. End -to -end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 280513 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR 280513-8 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY I SECTION 280528 - PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ■ 1.2 SUMMARY A. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate ' adapters serving electrical systems. 2. Division 27 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving communications systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C, IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. . 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed in Division 27 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems." PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4. B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: ENT or RNC. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the following: a. Apparatus Bays. b. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4 -inch trade size. D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings. G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA -569 -B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot -water pipes. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND 280528-2 SECURITY I Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90- degree bends in any conduit run except for communications wiring conduits for which only two 90- degree bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10 -foot intervals. 2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Coat field -cut threads on PVC - coated pathway with a corrosion- preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts. M. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to conduit assembly to assure a continuous ground path. O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2 -inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length. P. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-3 HI Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use. Q. Surface Pathways: 1. Install surface pathway for surface electrical outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2 -inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor -type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. R. Pathways for Optical -Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4 -Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet 2. 1 -Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet 3. Install with a maximum of two 90- degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. S. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings V. Expansion -Joint Fittings: Install in each run of aboveground EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight -run length that exceeds 100 feet. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. C. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND 280528-4 SECURITY i !I fl D d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. W. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. X. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. Y. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic Safety and Security Pathways and Cabling." 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 280528 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528-5 SECTION 280544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non -fire -rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve -seal systems. 3. Sleeve -seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire- resistance -rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items. 2. Division 27 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 See Division 27 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling" for all products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON - FIRE -RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR 280544-1 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above -Grade Non - Fire -Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: Interior Penetrations of Non - Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants. ". b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core - drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non -Fire -Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. E. Roof - Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot -type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. F. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast -iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.2 SLEEVE- SEAL - SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve -seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs -on -grade at pathway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR 280544-2 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING 0 n - I L I P fl r1 3.3 SLEEVE- SEAL - FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve -seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve -seal fittings. END OF SECTION 280544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR 280544-3 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING l _I l� 11 SECTION 282300 — VIDEO SURVEILLANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes a video surveillance system consisting of cameras, video recorder, data transmission wiring, and a control station with its associated equipment. B. Division 27, "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." C. Division 27, "Communications Horizontal Cabling." D. Division 28, "Cables and Conductors for Electronic Safety and Security." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AGC: Automatic gain control. B. BNC: Bayonet Neill - Concelman - type of connector. C. B/W: Black and white. D. CCD: Charge- coupled device. E. FTP: File transfer protocol. F. IP: Internet protocol. G. LAN: Local area network. H. MPEG: Moving picture experts group. I. NTSC: National Television System Committee. J. PC: Personal computer. K. PTZ: Pan- tilt -zoom. L. RAID: Redundant array of independent disks. M. TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet. N. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. O. WAN: Wide area network. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For video surveillance. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Functional Block Diagram: Show single -line interconnections between components for signal transmission and control. Show cable types and sizes. 3. Dimensioned plan and elevations of equipment racks, control panels, and consoles. Show access and workspace requirements. 4. UPS: Sizing calculations. 5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer, serial number, location, and date of original installation. Add pretesting record of each piece of equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, set points of adjustments, I VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282300-1 F1 name and description of the view of preset positions, description of alarms, and description of unit output responses to an alarm. D. Field quality- control reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, infrared illuminators, monitors, videotape recorders, digital video recorders, video switches, and control- station components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site for ready access. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Electronic data exchange between video surveillance system with an access - control system shall comply with SIA TVAC. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability: 1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 60 to 85 deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. 2. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central- station control unit, installed in air - conditioned interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 36 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control - station equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Video -signal format shall comply with NTSC standard, composite interlaced video. Composite video - signal termination shall be 75 ohms. B. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor's entry connection to components. 1. Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient - Voltage Suppression for Low - Voltage Electrical Power Circuits." L r � d n L J P VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282300-2 1 11 2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low - Voltage ' Power Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient- Voltage Suppression for Low - Voltage Electrical Power Circuits." as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected. 2.2 STANDARD CAMERAS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bosch Security Systems (Type NWD -495 FlexiDomeDN IP Camera). B. Automatic Color Dome Camera: Assembled and tested as a manufactured unit, containing dome assembly, color camera, zoom lens, and receiver /driver. 1. Comply with UL 639. 2. Pickup Device: 1/3" CCD interline transfer, 380,000 768(H) by 494(V) pixels. 3. Horizontal Resolution: 480 lines. 4. Internet Protocol (IP) type camera, 10 /100BaseT, auto - sensing, half /full- duplex. 5. Power- over - Ethernet (POE / IEEE 802.3af) powered. 6. White Balance: Auto - tracing white balance, with manually settable fixed balance option. ' 7. Sensitivity (at 3200K, scene reflectivity 89 %): a. Night Mode: 1. l lx full video. b. Night Mode w/ SenseUp: 0. 11 Ix full video. C. Color w/ SenseUp: 0.27lx full video. 8. RJ45 /8P8C connection. 9. Vandal resistant.. 10. Variable, manually adjustable zoom/focus adjustment. 11. Automatic iris control. 12. Polycarbonate, scratch resistant, clear dome. 13. Provide auxiliary power supply and environmental heater /fan where exterior conditions require. 2.3 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bosch Security Systems (Type DiBos Digital Video Recorder). B. Description: Networkable, full -frame and motion recorder, with removable hard drive. 1. Recording Time: 400 hours minimum. 2. Resolution: 720 by 480 lines, minimum. 3. Programming shall be from software interface, settings shall be displayed on any video monitor connected to the recorder. Programming shall include the following: a. Motion analysis graph. b. Password protection. C. Alarm and timer controls. d. Continuous recording option. e. Time -lapse operating modes. f. Search video by time, event, or motion. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282300-3 Fi 4. Programming: SmartMedia card for software updating, image archiving, and image transfer to a PC. 5. Storage: 1.0 TB, removable hard drive. Software shall permit hot - swapping drives. 6. Compression: MPEG -2. 7. Time and Date Generator: Records time (hr: min: sec) and date legend of each frame. 8. Audio Recording: 70 to 7000 Hz. Phono and microphone input; phono output. 9. Mounting: Standard 19 -inch rack complying with CEA 310 -E, or freestanding desktop. 2.4 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS A. Cable: Category 6 UTP. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." B. Connectors: RJ45 /8P8C, keyed modular plugs, rated for Category 6. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerance, hazards to camera installation, and other conditions affecting installation. B. Examine roughing -in for LAN, WAN, and IP network before device installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except raceways are not required in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics. 2. Except raceways are not required in hollow gypsum board partitions. 3. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips injunction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A -486B. E. For LAN connection copper communication wiring, comply with Division 27 Sections "Communications Backbone Cabling" and "Communications Horizontal Cabling." F. Grounding: Provide independent - signal circuit grounding recommended in writing by manufacturer. D J C J J r] I 3.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb. B. Install cameras with 84- inch - minimum clear space below cameras and their mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282300-4 C. Set pan unit and pan- and -tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera. Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust. D. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations unless otherwise indicated. E. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches, arranged to detect unauthorized entry into system- component enclosures and mounted in self - protected, inconspicuous positions. F. Avoid ground loops by making ground connections only at the control station. G. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a•factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 2. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video - surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows: a. Prepare equipment list described in "Submittals" Article. b. Verify operation of auto -iris lenses. C. Set back -focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter. d. Set back -focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in place. e. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. f. Set sensitivity of motion detection. g. Connect and verify responses to alarms. h. Verify operation of control- station equipment. i. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule. 3. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes. C. Video surveillance system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied I VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282300-5 conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other - than- normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Check cable connections. 2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto -iris lenses and adjust back -focus as needed. 3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner's use of video surveillance system. 5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Clean video - surveillance- system components, including camera - housing windows, lenses, and monitor screens. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video - surveillance equipment. END OF SECTION 282300 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282300-6 1